TT4031
(SE-GM29)
Wireless Modem
TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem Unit
Sony Ericsson GM29
Original Equipment Manufactured by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International
Owner’s Manual
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 1 of 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices, License, and Warranty
CAUTION: TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS PROVIDES TO YOU THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM
PRODUCT ALONE. HOWEVER, THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT MAY ALLOW YOU TO
RECEIVE WHERE AVAILABLE FROM A THIRD PARTY (SUCH AS YOUR DISTRIBUTOR) OTHER SERVICES
ENABLED THROUGH THE USE OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT. TOPP CONSUMER
PRODUCTS DOES NOT PROVIDE, AND IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR, ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THOUGH OR IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT.
*If you purchased this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product directly from Topp Consumer Products, the
references above to “Distributor” should be understood to mean Topp Consumer Products.
LICENSE: USING THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS
OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT SET FORTH BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, RETURN
THETT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT UNOPENED TO TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS OR YOUR
DISTRIBUTOR FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THE PRODUCT.
The use of the software and other proprietary information embedded in the TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product
(collectively, the “Proprietary Information”) is licensed to you on a non-exclusive, non-transferable, and fully revocable
basis and only in machine-readable form (object code) solely and exclusively for use in connection with only one (1)
TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product under normal conditions in accordance with the specifications set forth in
this manual. All rights not granted herein to the Proprietary Information are expressly reserved by Topp Consumer
Products and Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, as applicable.
You may use the Proprietary Information only as installed by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International on this
TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product.
The license is effective for the term specified by Topp Consumer Products or the distributor from which you purchased this
TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product. You may terminate it at any time by destroying or disabling this TT4031
(SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any term or condition set
forth herein.
YOU SHALL NOT, NOR SHALL YOU ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO COPY, DECOMPILE, DISASSEMBLE OR
OTHERWISE REVERSE ENGINEER THE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION, OR ATTEMPT TO DO SO. YOU SHALL
NOT, NOR SHALL YOU ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO REMOVE, COVER OR ALTER ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR
TRADEMARK NOTICES PLACED UPON, EMBEDDED IN OR DISPLAYED BY THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS
MODEM PRODUCT OR ITS PACKAGING OR RELATED MATERIALS.
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT, THIS LICENSE WILL
TRANSFER WITH IT IF THE OTHER PARTY ACCEPTS THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE. YOU
MUST IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS OF THE TRANSFER. YOU MAY NOT EXPORT OR RE-
EXPORT THE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION IN VIOLATION OF ANY APPLICABLE LAWS OR REGULATIONS.
You may not sublicense, assign or transfer this license except as expressly set forth above. Any attempt otherwise to
sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void.
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY: The TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product hardware, accessories and supplies
are warranted by Topp Consumer Products against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period
of one (1) year from the date of original purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF THE TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS
MODEM PRODUCT CASING IS OPENED BY ANYONE OTHER THAN A TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCT AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY.
The software embedded in this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product is warranted by Topp Consumer Products
against failure to perform in substantial conformance with its specifications under normal use for a period of 90 days from
the date of valid activation; provided, however, that Topp Consumer Products does not warrant that the operation of the
software will be error-free or uninterrupted or that the software functions will meet your requirements or that all defects in
the software will be corrected. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF YOU BREACH THE SOFTWARE LICENSE SET FORTH
ABOVE.
This Limited Warranty is good only to the original purchaser of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product, bearing
the TT4031 (SE-GM29) label, in the U.S. during the warranty period specified above and is conditioned upon proper use
of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product. A purchase receipt or other proof of the date of original purchase will
be required before warranty service is rendered.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER: (1) damage, failure or malfunction caused by or attributable to acts of
God, abuse, neglect, accident, misuse, improper or abnormal usage, failure to follow instructions, improper installation or
maintenance, alteration, lightning or other incidence of excess voltage or current, or any other occurrence beyond the
reasonable control of Topp Consumer Products, including, without limitation, services not provided by Topp Consumer
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 3 of 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Products that may be enabled through the use of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product; (2) this TT4031 (SE-
GM29) Wireless Modem product, if the serial number has been removed or defaced; (3) any repairs other than those
provided by a Topp Consumer Products Authorized Service Facility; (4) malfunctions due to the use of this TT4031 (SE-
GM29) Wireless Modem product in conjunction with accessories, products, or ancillary or peripheral equipment not
furnished by Topp Consumer Products; (5) consumables such as fuses; (6) any modification of any part of this TT4031
(SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product or any cosmetic damage; (7) use of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem
product at any time not within a valid license period for the embedded software; or (8) any shipment of this TT4031 (SE-
GM29) Wireless Modem product (claims must be presented to the carrier).
This Limited Warranty covers batteries (if any) supplied with the TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product only if
battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any
battery if (a) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by Topp Consumer Products for
charging the battery; (b) any seals of the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (c) the battery has been
used in equipment other than this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product.
NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY IS MADE BY TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS OR ITS SUPPLIERS NOR IS ANY
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT OR THE
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE). NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE MADE IN
RESPECT OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT OR THE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE) AND, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TOPP CONSUMER
PRODUCTS DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES IN RESPECT OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29)
WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT AND THE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE). IF ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLIES TO THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT OR THE PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE), SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE.
In the event of a breach of warranty, Topp Consumer Products will, at its option, unless otherwise provided by law: (a)
correct the defect by repairing this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product without charge for parts and labor; or (b)
replace this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product with one of the same or similar design (which for all purposes of
the provisions of this License, Warranty and Notices section shall also be referred to as “this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless
Modem product”). However, Topp Consumer Products will not pay for (i) costs of installation or removal, (ii) costs of
product set-up or adjustment, or (iii) shipping or related charges of returning this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem
product for repair, regardless of whether the repair is covered by the Limited Warranty set forth above. You must pay for
shipment of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product to the nearest Topp Consumer Products Authorized
Service Facility and, if the warranty claim is valid, Topp Consumer Products will pay for shipment of the repaired or
replaced TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product back to you. You must provide a purchase receipt or other proof of
the date of original purchase before warranty service will be rendered. All replaced parts and products, and products on
which a refund is made, become the property of Topp Consumer Products. Unless prohibited by law, new or reconditioned
parts and TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem products may be used in the performance of warranty service. Repaired
or replaced parts and TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem products are warranted for the remainder of the original
limited warranty period. You will be charged for the repair or replacement of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem
product made after the expiration of the warranty period.
Applicable law may restrict or prohibit certain of the warranty limitations set forth above, in which case they will not apply
to you. You may also have additional rights not stated in this document. If any portion of this limited warranty is illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the remainder of this limited warranty.
This Limited Warranty allocates the risk of product and software failure between you and Topp Consumer Products, and
Topp Consumer Products’ pricing of this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product reflects this allocation of risk and
the limitations of liability set forth below. The agents, employees, distributors, and dealers of Topp Consumer Products are
not authorized to make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional warranties binding on Topp Consumer
Products. Accordingly, additional statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether oral or written, do not
constitute warranties by Topp Consumer Products and should not be relied upon.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NEITHER TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR
THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT, ACCESSORIES OR THE
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE), NOR FOR THE LOSS OF PROPERTY OR DATA,
LOSS OF INCOME, INCONVENIENCE, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29)
WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT, ACCESSORIES OR THE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION (INCLUDING THE
SOFTWARE) OR FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY WHATSOEVER,
EVEN IF TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF SUCH DAMAGES ARISE FROM THE NEGLIGENCE OF TOPP CONSUMER
PRODUCTS AND/OR ITS SUPPLIERS.
Applicable law may restrict or prohibit certain of the liability limitations set forth above, in which case they will not apply to
you. You may also have additional rights not stated in this document. If any portion of this limitation on liability is illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the remainder of this limitation on liability.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 4 of 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT MAY ALLOW YOU, AT YOUR
DISCRETION, TO RECEIVE WHERE AVAILABLE FROM A THIRD PARTY (SUCH AS YOUR DISTRIBUTOR) OTHER
SERVICES ENABLED THROUGH THE USE OF THIS TT4031 (SE-GM29) WIRELESS MODEM PRODUCT, AND YOU
IRREVOCABLY AND ABSOLUTELY AGREE THAT TOPP CONSUMER PRODUCTS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN
CONNECTION WITH ANY ACTIONS, OMISSIONS, OR OTHER OCCURRENCES WITH RESPECT TO SUCH
SERVICES.
CAUTION: Modifications or adjustments to this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless Modem product, which are not expressly
approved by Topp Consumer Products, may void the user’s right or authority to operate this TT4031 (SE-GM29) Wireless
Modem product.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 5 of 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile
Communications International. The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other
than the officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document,
without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, is
strictly prohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile
Communications International, the copyright holder.
First edition (April 2003)
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making
any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further Sony Ericsson Mobile
Communications International reserves the right to make modifications, additions and
deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to
programs and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be
incorporated into new editions of this manual.
All rights reserved.
©
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2003
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 6 of 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Content
Part 1: Overview.................................................................................................................................. 12
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 13
1.1
1.2
1.3
Target Users....................................................................................................................... 13
Prerequisites...................................................................................................................... 13
Manual Structure.............................................................................................................. 13
2. TT4031 (SE-GM29) Modem ................................................................................................. 15
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Description.......................................................................................................................... 15
Highlights............................................................................................................................ 15
TT4031 (SE-GM29) in a Communication System................................................ 16
Main Features and Services......................................................................................... 18
Service and Support....................................................................................................... 22
3. Abbreviations............................................................................................................................. 23
Part 2: Integrating the Modem....................................................................................................... 25
1. Mechanical Description.......................................................................................................... 26
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................. 26
1.2
Physical Dimensions........................................................................................................ 28
2. Electrical Description.............................................................................................................. 29
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Power Connector.............................................................................................................. 29
Audio Connector............................................................................................................... 30
Antenna Connector.......................................................................................................... 32
SIM Card Reader.............................................................................................................. 33
RS232 Serial Port............................................................................................................. 34
Real Time Clock................................................................................................................ 36
Software Updates............................................................................................................. 36
3. Operation.................................................................................................................................... 37
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Switching On the Modem.............................................................................................. 37
Switching Off the Modem.............................................................................................. 37
Resetting the Modem ..................................................................................................... 37
Operating States/LED..................................................................................................... 38
4. Safety and Product Care....................................................................................................... 39
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Safety Instructions.......................................................................................................... 39
General Precautions........................................................................................................ 39
SIM Card Precautions..................................................................................................... 40
Antenna Precautions....................................................................................................... 40
5. Installation of the Modem..................................................................................................... 42
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Where to Install the Modem........................................................................................ 42
How to Install the Modem ............................................................................................ 43
OEM Labeling..................................................................................................................... 44
Antenna ............................................................................................................................... 44
Attachments....................................................................................................................... 47
6. Technical Data........................................................................................................................... 48
7. FCC Certificate.......................................................................................................................... 53
Part 3: Using AT Commands........................................................................................................... 54
1. Introduction to AT Commands............................................................................................ 55
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................. 55
1.2
Syntax Description.......................................................................................................... 55
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 7 of 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3
1.4
Error Codes ........................................................................................................................ 59
Examples on How to Use the AT Commands........................................................ 62
Call Control......................................................................................................................................... 63
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
AT+CPIN PIN Control ..................................................................................................... 63
ATA Answer Incoming Call........................................................................................... 63
ATD Dial............................................................................................................................... 64
ATH Hang up...................................................................................................................... 66
ATO Return to Online Data Mode............................................................................... 66
ATP Select Pulse Dialing................................................................................................ 66
ATT Select Tone Dialing................................................................................................. 67
ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control ...................................................................... 67
AT+CHUP Hang up Call.................................................................................................. 68
2.10 AT+CMOD Call Mode ...................................................................................................... 68
2.11 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up............................................................................................. 69
2.12 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation........................................................................ 70
Control and Status.......................................................................................................................... 71
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
ATQ Result Code Suppression..................................................................................... 71
ATS0 Automatic Answer Control................................................................................ 71
ATS2 Escape Sequence Character............................................................................. 72
ATS3 Command Line Termination Character........................................................ 73
ATS4 Response Formatting Character..................................................................... 73
ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)..................................... 74
ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control..................................................................................... 74
ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout.................................................................... 75
ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control...................................................................... 76
3.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control.......................................................... 76
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring............................................................................ 77
3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time................................................................ 78
3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset................................................................................ 78
3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event........................................................................................ 79
3.15 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date..................................................................................... 80
3.16 AT+CEER Extended Error Report............................................................................... 80
3.17 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality............................................................................ 81
3.18 AT+CIND Indicator Control.......................................................................................... 82
3.19 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands ............................................................. 83
3.20 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error............................................................................ 83
3.21 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting...................................................... 84
3.22 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status................................................................................. 85
3.23 AT+CPIN PIN Control ..................................................................................................... 87
3.24 AT+CPWD Change Password....................................................................................... 88
3.25 AT+CR Service Reporting Control ............................................................................. 90
3.26 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code...................................................................................... 91
3.27 AT+CSAS Save Settings................................................................................................ 92
3.28 AT+CSQ Signal Strength .............................................................................................. 93
3.29 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update................................................................. 93
4. Audio............................................................................................................................................. 95
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification........................................ 95
AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation.......................................................... 100
AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request................................................................... 102
AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection............................................................. 103
AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal..................................................................... 105
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 8 of 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode ..................................................................... 106
AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode...................................................................... 106
AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request............................................ 107
AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control............................................... 108
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD............................................................................................................... 110
5.1
AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type.................................................................... 110
5.2
AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol.................................................................................... 111
6. Data - GPRS............................................................................................................................. 114
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate................................................ 114
AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach......................................................................... 115
AT+CGDATA Enter Data State.................................................................................. 116
AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context......................................................................... 116
AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting........................................................................ 118
AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address........................................................................... 119
AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable).................... 120
AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)........................................ 123
AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status................................................. 125
6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages............................................ 127
7. Data - HSCSD.......................................................................................................................... 128
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters......................................................... 128
AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters ................................................................... 129
AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration................................... 130
AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report.................................................................... 131
AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading................................... 133
8. Fax............................................................................................................................................... 134
8.1
AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification...................... 134
8.2
Low Level Fax Commands.......................................................................................... 135
9. Identification............................................................................................................................ 136
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
AT Attention Command ............................................................................................... 136
AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration......................................................... 136
AT&W Store User Profile.............................................................................................. 136
AT* List all Supported AT Commands.................................................................... 137
AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification................................................ 137
AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification ............................................................. 137
AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification......................................................... 138
AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification............................. 139
ATI Identification Information................................................................................... 139
9.10 AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List......................................................... 140
10.
Interface................................................................................................................................ 141
10.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control ................................................................................................... 141
10.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control.............................................................................. 141
10.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................................................... 141
10.4 AT&S Circuit 107 (DSR) Response.......................................................................... 142
10.5 AT+WS46 Mode Selection.......................................................................................... 142
10.6 ATE Command Echo...................................................................................................... 143
10.7 ATV DCE Response Format........................................................................................ 143
10.8 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration........................................................................ 144
10.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol.................................................... 145
10.10
10.11
10.12
AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings.......................................................................... 147
AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format ...................................................... 147
AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control................................................................. 148
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 9 of 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.13
10.14
10.15
AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting ............................................. 149
AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command............................................................ 150
AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time.............................................. 151
11.
Network................................................................................................................................. 152
11.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description .............................................................. 152
11.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode................................ 153
11.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication ....................................................... 159
11.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status ................................................................. 160
11.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile........................................................ 160
11.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network ............................................... 161
11.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network.............................................. 162
11.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number..................................................... 163
11.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name ........................................................................... 164
11.10
11.11
11.12
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.16
11.17
AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification...................................................................... 165
AT+CLCK Facility Lock............................................................................................. 165
AT+CNUM Subscriber Number.............................................................................. 167
AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation................................. 169
AT+COPS Operator Selection................................................................................ 170
AT+CREG Network Registration........................................................................... 171
AT*ECPI Ciphering Indicator................................................................................. 172
AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS....................................................... 174
12.
Phonebook............................................................................................................................ 176
12.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum........................................... 176
12.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group ............................................................................. 176
12.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group............................................................................. 177
12.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number........................................................ 178
12.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group............................................................................. 180
12.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item.................................................................... 180
12.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read ................................................................................ 181
12.8 AT*EGIR Ericsson Group Item Read....................................................................... 182
12.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number...................................................................... 182
12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
AT+CPBF Phonebook Find...................................................................................... 184
AT+CPBR Phonebook Read.................................................................................... 184
AT+CPBS Phone Storage........................................................................................ 186
AT+CPBW Phonebook Write .................................................................................. 187
13.
Short Message Services - Point to Point................................................................... 189
13.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control ................................................................................................... 189
13.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages............................................ 189
13.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage................................................................... 189
13.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address........................................................................... 191
13.5 AT+CMGF Message Format........................................................................................ 192
13.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory................................................................... 192
13.7 AT+CMGS Send Message............................................................................................ 195
13.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage.................................................................................. 199
13.9 AT+CMGC Send Command........................................................................................ 200
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
13.15
AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE....................................................... 203
AT+CMGR Read Message........................................................................................ 207
AT+CMGL List Message........................................................................................... 213
AT+CMGD Delete Message..................................................................................... 220
AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters ........................................................... 221
AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters................................................................ 221
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 10 of 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.16
13.17
AT+CSCS Select Character Set............................................................................ 223
AT+CSMS Select Message Service...................................................................... 224
14.
Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast ................................................................. 226
14.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE........................................................... 226
14.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type.................................................. 226
15.
SIM Application Toolkit.................................................................................................... 227
15.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control ................................................................................................... 227
15.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings...................................................... 227
15.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text........................................................................ 228
15.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey............................................................................. 229
15.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input............................................................................... 232
15.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item........................................................................... 234
15.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu....................................................................... 237
15.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)............................................ 239
15.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call........................................................................... 240
15.10
15.11
15.12
15.13
15.14
*E2STKE STK Send Short Message.................................................................... 242
*E2STKP STK Send SS ............................................................................................ 244
*E2STKU STK Send USSD...................................................................................... 245
*E2STKR STK Refresh.............................................................................................. 246
AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings............................................... 246
16.
Supplementary Services ................................................................................................. 248
16.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control ................................................................................................... 248
16.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter ......................................................................... 248
16.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum.................................................... 249
16.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge....................................................................................... 249
16.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table...................................................... 251
16.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function........................................................................... 252
16.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set.......................................................................... 252
16.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set ......................................................................................... 253
16.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch............................................ 254
16.10
16.11
16.12
16.13
16.14
16.15
16.16
16.17
AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications .................................... 255
AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions....................................... 259
AT+CCWA Call Waiting............................................................................................ 262
AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty..................................................................... 264
AT+CLIP Call Line Identification Presentation................................................ 265
AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction.............................................. 267
AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification............................................... 268
AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data................................ 270
17.
Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands........................................................................ 274
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 11 of 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 1: Overview
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 12 of 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
1.1 Target Users
TT4031 (SE-GM29) modems are designed to be integrated into machine-
machine or man-to-machine communications applications. They are intended
to be used by manufacturers, system integrators, applications developers and
developers of wireless communications equipment.
1.2 Prerequisites
It is assumed that the person integrating the TT4031 (SE-GM29) into an
application has a basic understanding of the following:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
GSM networking;
Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);
AT commands;
ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;
Micro controllers and programming;
Electronic hardware design.
1.3 Manual Structure
The manual is composed of four parts:
Part 1- Overview
This section provides a broad overview of the TT4031 (SE-GM29) and
includes a list of abbreviations used in the manual.
Part 2 - Integrating the Modem
This section describes each of the signals available on the TT4031 (SE-GM29)
modem, along with mechanical information. The section also provides you
with design guidelines and explains what is needed to commercialise an
application from a regulatory point of view.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 13 of 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 3 - Using AT Commands
This section lists all the AT commands relevant to the TT4031 (SE-GM29),
including their associated parameters. The purpose of part 3 is to give you
detailed information about the function of each command in the AT command
set.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 14 of 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. TT4031 (SE-GM29) Modem
2.1 Description
The dual band EGSM 900/1800 MHz TT4031 (SE-GM29) is a GSM/GPRS serial
modem. The modem is a powerful and flexible device that can be used in a
wide range of telemetry and telematics applications that rely on the remote
exchange of data, voice, SMS or faxes via the GSM cellular network.
Small and lightweight, the TT4031 (SE-GM29) has standard connectors and
an integral SIM card reader making it easy and quick to integrate. As well as
providing a standard RS232 serial communication interface the TT4031 (SE-
GM29) also has an audio interface allowing an analogue handset to be
connected. When the TT4031 (SE-GM29) is integrated into an external
application, a wireless communications system is created.
A typical end-to-end system consists of a micro controller in an external
application communicating, via the TT4031 (SE-GM29) modem, with a
remote terminal or host using the GSM network. The micro controller uses a
set of AT commands to control the modem, and to set up the end-to-end
communications link, via its 9-way RS232 serial interface.
TT4031 (SE-GM29) serial modems are intended to be used by manufacturers,
system integrators, application developers and developers of a wide range of
equipment and business solutions, typically in the following fields:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Security and alarms
Vending
Monitoring and control
Utilities
Fleet Management
2.2 Highlights
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Dual band, EGSM 900/1800 MHz, GSM/GPRS serial modem
Flexible plug-and-play device
Data: GPRS, HSCSD, CSD, SMS
Voice: full rate, enhanced full rate, half rate
SMS: mobile-originated, mobile-terminated, cell broadcast
Fax: Group 3, Classes 1 & 2
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 15 of 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
RS232 9-way serial interface
5 V - 32 V DC input
4-wire audio connection
Antenna connection (FME male)
FCC and PTCRB approved
2.3 TT4031 (SE-GM29) in a Communication System
Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication system
using the TT4031 (SE-GM29). It also shows the communication principles of
the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this manual,
are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.
ꢀ
The MS (mobile station) represents the TT4031 (SE-GM29)
modem plus SIM card. The modem excluding SIM card, is known
as the ME (mobile equipment).
ꢀ
The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a
computer) and is a part of the application.
Wireless Communication System
GSM Network
Application
ME status, responses
TE
MS
(DTE)
(TT4030)
AT commands to control MS
Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System
In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International
Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector)
V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.
The functions of the TT4031 (SE-GM29) follow the recommendations
provided by ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and
ITU-T.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 16 of 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element of the
modem; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson specific
commands.
To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 3: Using AT
Commands”.
Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the modem and the application.
The entire System Connector Interface is described in detail in “Electrical
Description”.
Power
and Signals
RJ11
Audio
Antenna
Connector
RJ9
DB9
MS
(TT4030)
TE
Serial data
(Application)
Figure 2.2 The Interface between the modem and the Application
ꢀ
ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment)
respectively.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 17 of 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 Main Features and Services
The modem performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM
standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The services and functions of the
modem are implemented by issuing AT commands over the RS232 serial
interface.
2.4.1 Types of Mobile Station
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is a dual band serial modem with the GSM radio
characteristics shown in the table below.
TT4031 (SE-GM29)
GSM 900
E-GSM900
GSM 1800
Frequency Range (MHz)
TX: 890-915
RX: 935-960
TX: 880-890
RX: 925-935
TX: 1710-1785
RX: 1805-1880
Channel spacing
200 kHz
200 kHz
Number of channels
173 carriers *8 (TDMA)
GSM: channels 1 to 124
E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023
GMSK
374 carriers *8 (TDMA)
DCS: channels 512 to 885
Modulation
GMSK
TX Phase Accuracy
Duplex spacing
< 5º RMS phase error (burst) < 5º RMS phase error (burst)
45 MHz
95 MHz
Receiver sensitivity at
antenna connector
< –102 dBm
< –102 dBm
Transmitter output power Class 4
Class 1
1 W (30 dBm)
at antenna connector
2 W (33 dBm)
Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM 1800
2.4.2 Short Message Service
The modem supports the following SMS services:
ꢀ Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data
unit) and text mode supported.
ꢀ Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text
mode supported.
ꢀ CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is
sent to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 18 of 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GSM network (for example, traffic reports). This feature is
network dependent.
ꢀ SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.
ꢀ SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.
The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using 7-
bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 characters. The
modem supports up to 6 concatenated messages to extend this function.
2.4.3 Voice Calls
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) offers the capability of mobile originated and
mobile terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.
Multiparty, call waiting and call deflection features are available. Some of
these features are network-operator specific.
For the inter-connection of audio, the modem offers a balanced 4-wire
analogue interface.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) is supported.
2.4.4 Data
The modem supports the following data protocols:
ꢀ GPRS (General Packet Radio Service).
Modems are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous
activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. TT4031
(SE-GM29) modems are GPRS class 8 (4+1) enabled devices,
which are capable of transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up
link), and receiving at a maximum of four timeslots per frame
(down link).
ꢀ CSD (Circuit Switched Data).
TT4031 (SE-GM29) modems are capable of establishing a CSD
communication at 9.6 kbps.
ꢀ HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).
TT4031 (SE-GM29) supports HSCSD class 2 (2+1)
communication, with one timeslot per frame capacity in the up
link and two timeslots per frame capacity in the down link.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 19 of 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4.5 Fax
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) allows fax transmissions to be sent and received by
commercial software installed on the application computer. Group 3 fax
Classes 1 and 2 are supported.
2.4.6 Supplementary Services
ꢀ Call forwarding
ꢀ Call hold, waiting and multiparty
ꢀ Calling/called number identification
ꢀ Advice of charge
ꢀ USSD
ꢀ Alternate line service
ꢀ Customer service profile
ꢀ Preferred networks
ꢀ Operator selection
ꢀ Network registration
ꢀ Call barring
ꢀ Call transfer
2.4.7 Serial Communication
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) enables an end-to-end communication path to be
established between the external telemetry/telematics application and a
remote terminal or host, via the GSM network. Once a path has been set
up, voice or data communication can take place. Serial data with flow
control according to the RS232 signalling protocol operates between the
modem and the external application.
Control of the TT4031 (SE-GM29) is by the external application, via the
RS232 serial interface, using a set of AT commands. The TT4031 (SE-
GM29) supports the full set of AT commands according to GSM 07.05 and
GSM 07.07. It also supports an extended set of Ericsson proprietary AT
commands to add extra functionality.
AT commands are used to operate the modem and have a broad range of
functions including:
ꢀ configuring general parameters of the TT4031 (SE-GM29);
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 20 of 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ setting up and controlling communications to and from the GSM
network;
ꢀ configuring the modem to communicate across the RS232 serial
interface;
ꢀ and obtaining GSM network status information.
For more detail on the AT commands supported by the TT4031 (SE-GM29)
see “Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands”.
2.4.8 Interfacing with the TT4031 (SE-GM29).
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) uses the following industry standard connectors to
interface with the external application and the GSM network;
ꢀ RJ11 (plug-in power supply connector)
ꢀ RJ9 (handset audio connector)
ꢀ Integral SIM card reader
ꢀ FME male (antenna connector)
ꢀ Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 21 of 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 Service and Support
To contact customer support please use the details below:
Customer Support
Topp Consumer Products
3055 NW 84th Avenue
Miami, FL 33122
E-mail: [email protected]
Information about Topp Consumer Products and its products is available
on the following web site:
http://www.toppcompanies.com
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 22 of 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanations
AMR
CBM
CBS
Adaptive Multi Rate
Cell Broadcast Message
Cell Broadcast Service
CSD
DCE
DTE
Circuit Switched Data
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
Data Terminal Equipment
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Enhanced Full Rate
DTMF
EFR
EMC
E-OTD
ESD
ETSI
FCC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Enhanced Observed Time Difference
Electrostatic Discharge
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
Federal Communications Commission
Full Rate
FR
GPRS
GSM
HR
General Packet Radio Service
Global System for Mobile Communication
Half Rate
HSCSD
ITU-T
High Speed Circuit Switched Data
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications
Standardisation Sector
ME
Mobile Equipment
MO
Mobile Originated
MS
Mobile Station
MT
Mobile Terminated
Protocol Data Unit
PDU
PTCRB
RF
PCS Type Certification Review Board
Radio Frequency
RLP
RTC
SIM
Radio Link Protocol
Real Time Clock
Subscriber Identity Module
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 23 of 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SMS
TA
Short Message Service
Terminal Adapter
TE
Terminal Equipment
Telecom Services
TS
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 24 of 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 2: Integrating the Modem
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 25 of 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Mechanical Description
1.1 Overview
The pictures below show the mechanical design of the TT4031 (SE-GM29)
along with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes.
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) case is made of durable PC/ABS plastic.
Figure 1.1 TT4031 (SE-GM29) viewed from the left side
Figure 1.2 TT4031 (SE-GM29) viewed from the right side
Please note the following:
ꢀ Mounting holes positioned at two of the corners make it possible
to securely bolt the modem into your application.
ꢀ Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of
the modem.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 26 of 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ The SIM card is mounted in the modem.
ꢀ The pins and electrical characteristics or the modem’s various
connectors are described in Electrical Description
ꢀ
ꢀ Information about the antenna connector is found in
Antenna Connector
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 27 of 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Physical Dimensions
ꢀ Measurements are given in millimeters. See also Technical Data
.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 28 of 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Electrical Description
All electrical connections to the TT4031 (SE-GM29) are designed to meet
the standard air (4 kV) and contact (8 kV) discharge ESD tests, of
EN 301 489-1.
The modem uses the following industry standard connectors:
ꢀ RJ11 6-way (power connector)
ꢀ RJ9 4-way (handset connector)
ꢀ SIM card reader
ꢀ FME male coaxial jack (antenna connector)
ꢀ Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)
2.1 Power Connector
An RJ11 6-way connector, as shown and described below, serves as a
means of supplying and controlling d.c. power to the modem.
The supply voltage, VCC, required by the modem is in the range 5 V - 32 V
d.c. Application of the supply voltage does not switch the modem on. To do
so an additional active-high control signal, TO_IN, must be applied for
> 0.2 s .
A second active-high control signal, HR_IN, can be used to switch the
modem off when applied for 1 - 2 seconds, or can be used to perform a
hardware reset when applied for > 3.5 s.
TO_IN and HR_IN are referenced to GND (pin 6 on the connector).
VCC and GND are reverse polarity and overvoltage protected
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 29 of 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power connector electrical characteristics are listed below:
Pin Signal
Dir
Limits
Description
1
2
3
VCC
-
I
-
I
5 - 32 V
-
Positive power input
No connection
HR_IN
–0.5 - 32 V Active high control line used to switch
off or reset the modem
VIH > 5 V, VIL < 2 V
Power off: 1 s < t < 2 s
Hard reset: t > 3.5 s
4
TO_IN
I
–0.5 - 32 V Active high control line used to switch
on the modem
VIH > 5 V, VIL < 2 V
Power on: t > 0.2 s
5
6
-
-
I
-
-
No connection
GND
Negative power (ground) input and
return path for TO_IN and HR_IN
2.2 Audio Connector
A 4-way RJ9 connector, as shown below, allows a telephone handset to be
plugged into the modem, giving access to the microphone and earpiece
signals. The connector may also be used to drive other analogue audio sub-
systems or devices.
Although the TT4031 (SE-GM29) is pre-configured to work with a range of
handsets, the audio interface is flexible and its performance can be
configured, using AT commands, to match a particular handset or audio
subsystem.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 30 of 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio signal descriptions are listed below:
Pin
Signal
Dir
Description
1
2
3
4
MICN
I
Microphone negative input
Earpiece negative output
Earpiece positive output
Microphone positive input
BEARN
BEARP
MICP
O
O
I
MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input signals. These
inputs are compatible with an electret microphone.
BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output signals. These are differential
mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the table below.
Parameter
Limit
4.0 Vpp
2.8 Vpp
5 %
Output level (differential)
Output level (dynamic load = 32 Ω)
Distortion at 1 kHz and maximum output level
Offset, BEARP to BEARN
± 30 mV
40 dB
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation
The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be connected
to BEARP and BEARN.
Ear piece model
Impedance
Tolerance
Dynamic ear piece
Dynamic ear piece
Piezo ear piece
[32 Ω+ 800 µH] // 100 pF
[150 Ω+ 800 µH] // 100 pF
1 kΩ+ 60 nF
± 20 %
± 20 %
± 20 %
ꢀ Compliance with AMR may be required by certain
network operators.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 31 of 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Antenna Connector
The antenna connector allows transmission of radio frequency (RF) signals
between the modem and an external customer-supplied antenna. The
modem is fitted with a 50 Ω FME male coaxial jack as shown below.
The table below shows the antenna electrical characteristics:
Parameter
Limit
Description
Nominal impedance
50 Ω (SWR better than
2.5:1)
Output Power
2 Watt peak (Class 4)
1 Watt peak (Class 1)
Better than –102 dBm
Better than –102 dBm
Extended GSM 900
GSM 1800
Static Sensitivity
Extended GSM900
GSM 1800
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 32 of 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 SIM Card Reader
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is fitted with a SIM card reader designed for 3 V
and 5 V SIM cards. It is the flip-up type, which is lockable in the horizontal
position and is accessed through a removable panel as shown below
The SIM card reader includes a SIM presence switch. This ensures that
when a SIM card is inserted or removed while the TT4031 (SE-GM29) is
turned ON, it will reset.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 33 of 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 RS232 Serial Port
The modem supports a standard RS232 serial interface (EIA/TIA 574) via
its 9 pin Sub-D connector, shown below. In line with serial communication
terminology the TT4031 (SE-GM29) serial modem should be considered as
the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) and the external application
or computer as the data terminating equipment (DTE).
The electrical characteristics of the serial port signals are shown below:
Pin Signal
Dir
Voltage
levels
Description
1
2
3
4
DCD
RD
O
O
I
> +4 V
< –4 V
Data carrier detect
Received data
> +4 V
< –4 V
TD
> 2 V
< 0.8 V
Transmitted data
Data terminal ready
DTR
I
> 2 V
< 0.8 V
5
6
GND
DSR
-
0 V
Ground connection
Data set ready
O
> +4 V
< –4 V
7
8
9
RTS
CTS
RI
I
> 2 V
< 0.8 V
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
O
O
> +4 V
< –4 V
> +4 V
< –4 V
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 34 of 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5.1 Serial Data
The modem supports the standard data character format of 1 start bit, 8 bit
data, no parity plus 1 stop bit, in total 10 bits per character.
2.5.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD
The default baud rate is 9.6 kbps, however higher bit rates up to 460 kbps
are supported. At start-up the TT4031 (SE-GM29) transmits and receives
data at the default rate of 9.6 kbps in either standard AT mode or binary
mode (the first received data - AT or binary format - determines the
operating mode). When reprogramming, the transmission rate is
automatically negotiated by the programming application. Speeds up to
460 kbps are supported.
Serial Data From Modem (RD)
RD is an output signal that the modem uses to send data to the application.
Serial Data To Modem (TD)
TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data to the modem.
2.5.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, RI
RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10 th of the data
transmission speed for data rates up to 460 kbps (byteoriented flow control
mechanism).
Request to Send (RTS)
Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is high
by internal pull up.
The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by an AT command. Software or
hardware control can be selected. Hardware flow is the default control.
The application must pull RTS low to communicate with the modem. The
modem will respond by asserting CTS low, indicating it is ready for
communication.
Clear To Send (CTS)
CTS indicates that the DCE is ready to transmit data. The default level is
high. You can define the exact behaviour of CTS through an AT command,
and can select software or hardware flow control.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 35 of 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. It also
acts as a hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high. The
signal is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR with an AT
command.
The DTR line can also be used to switch on the modem when activated for
0.2 seconds. The DTR line must be deactivated prior to switching off the
modem to ensure it switches off (powers down) correctly.
Data Set Ready (DSR)
An active DSR signal is sent from the modem to the application (DTE) to
confirm that a communications path has been established. DSR has two
modes of operation, which can be set using the AT command AT&S.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal) when
low. You can define the exact behaviour of DCD with an AT command.
Ring Indicator (RI)
RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when low.
You can define the exact behaviour or RI with an AT command.
2.6 Real Time Clock
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) contains a real time clock (RTC) to maintain
accurate timekeeping and to enable “timestamping” of messages.
The RTC is powered when d.c. power is connected to the modem AND the
modem is switched on. If the d.c. supply fails, a stored energy device
within the TT4031 (SE-GM29) provides back-up power to maintain the RTC
for at least 12 hours.
2.7 Software Updates
It is possible and sometimes necessary to update the TT4031 (SE-GM29)
software. Updates must be carried out by a Sony Ericsson approved
technician. Please contact your supplier for details (see “Service and
Support”).
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 36 of 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
3.1 Switching On the Modem
There are two ways to switch on the modem, once power is applied.
ꢀ either assert TO_IN high for > 0.2 s;
ꢀ or activate the RS232 control line DTR, high for > 0.2 s.
The modem is fully operational after 4 seconds. Logging onto a network
may take longer than this and is outside the control of the modem.
The modem can be configured to start up at the time power is applied by
permanently tying power connector signals TO_IN (pin 4) and VCC (pin 1)
together. In this case DTR must be used to switch the modem on again
after it has been switched off or reset, while power is still applied.
3.2 Switching Off the Modem
There are two ways to switch off (power down) the modem as described
below:
ꢀ either use the AT+CFUN command;
ꢀ or assert HR_IN high for 1 - 2 seconds. A delay of up to 10 s is
experienced as the modem logs off the network.
Note!_
The DTR line must be deactivated prior to
switching off the modem to ensure the unit
switches off correctly.
3.3 Resetting the Modem
A full system reset, independent of the status of the software, may be
applied to the modem as follows:
ꢀ assert HR_IN high for > 3.5 s.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 37 of 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ
3.4 Operating States/LED
The modem has a green LED, as depicted below, which is used to indicate
various operating states. These states are described in following table.
Operating State
LED Status
After switching on the modem
Switch off (Power down) or power removed
Standby or talk
On after 4 s
Off
Flashing
No network, network search, no SIM card, no PIN On
entered
ꢀ Switch off (Power Down): DC power is applied but the
modem is switched OFF.
Standby: The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is switched ON and camped on to the
network. No call in progress.
Talk: The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is switched ON and a voice/data call is in
progress.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 38 of 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Safety and Product Care
Please read the information in this section and the information in
Installation of the Modem
before starting your integration work.
4.1 Safety Instructions
PLEASE READ THESE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND KEEP A COPY OF THEM.
ꢀ Always ensure that use of the modem is permitted. The modem
may present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical
electronic devices. As a rule, the modem must not be used in
hospitals, airports or planes.
ꢀ Never use the modem at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting
area or in any other environment where explosives may be
present.
ꢀ Operating the modem close to other electronic devices, such as
antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic
interference.
ꢀ This product is intended to be used with the antenna or other
radiating element at least 20 cm away from any part of the
human body. In applications where this rule cannot be applied,
the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR
measurement test report and declaration.
ꢀ You are responsible for observing your country's safety
standards, and where applicable, the relevant wiring rules.
4.2 General Precautions
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) as a stand alone item is designed for indoor
use only. To use outside it must be integrated into a weatherproof
enclosure. Do not exceed the environmental and electrical limits as
specified in Technical Data
ꢀ Avoid exposing the modem to lighted cigarettes, naked flames
or to extreme hot or cold temperature.
ꢀ Never try to dismantle the modem yourself. There are no
components inside the modem that can be serviced by the user.
If you attempt to dismantle the modem, you may invalidate the
warranty.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 39 of 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ The TT4031 (SE-GM29) must not be installed or located where
the surface temperature of the plastic case may exceed 85ºC.
ꢀ All cables connected to the TT4031 (SE-GM29) must be secured
or clamped, immediately adjacent to the modem's connectors,
to provide strain relief and to avoid transmitting excessive
vibration to the modem in the installation.
ꢀ Ensure the d.c. cable, supplying power to the, TT4031 (SE-
GM29) does not exceed 3 metres. For longer distances please
contact Sony Ericsson (see “Service and Support”).
ꢀ To protect power supply cables and meet the fire safety
requirements when the unit is powered from a battery or a high
current supply, connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the
positive supply.
ꢀ Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the
TT4031 (SE-GM29).
ꢀ
Note! Sony Ericsson may refuse warranty claims
where evidence of product misuse is found.
4.3 SIM Card Precautions
ꢀ Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you
are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to
avoid electrostatic discharges.
ꢀ When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie
exposed under the SIM card holder.
ꢀ CAUTION! - Do not touch these connectors! If you
do, you may release an electrical discharge that could
damage the modem or the SIM card.
ꢀ When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibility
should be taken into account. We always recommend that you
have the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that
the SIM card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.
4.4 Antenna Precautions
ꢀ If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of
lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna
manufacturer.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 40 of 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ Never connect more than one modem to a single antenna. The
modem can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the
transmitter of another modem.
ꢀ Like any mobile station, the antenna of the modem emits radio
frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference),
you must determine whether the application itself, or equipment
in the application’s proximity, needs further protection against
radio emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is
secured either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by
moving the antenna away from the electronics and the external
signals cable.
ꢀ The modem and antenna may be damaged if either come into
contact with ground potentials other than the one in your
application. Beware, ground potential are not always what they
appear to be.
ꢀ If the application containing the TT4031 (SE-GM29) uses an
antenna which is less than 20cm away from any part of the
user’s body, integrators are legally obliged to publish SAR
figures for the product. SAR testing is the responsibility of the
system integrator.
ꢀ Even if SAR measurements are not required it is considered
good practice to insert a warning in any manual produced,
indicating it is a radio product and that care should be taken.
ꢀ The TT4031 (SE-GM29) module is FCC approved for fixed and
mobile applications. If the final product after integration is
intended for portable use, a new application and FCC ID is
required.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 41 of 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Installation of the Modem
This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate
the TT4031 (SE-GM29) into your application from a hardware
perspective. Please read the information given in Safety and Product
Care
and then the read the information in this section before starting your
integration work.
5.1 Where to Install the Modem
There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration
when designing your application as they might affect the modem and its
function. They are:
5.1.1 Environmental Conditions
The modem must be installed so that the environmental conditions stated
in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and vibration
are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the Technical Data
section must not be exceeded.
5.1.2 Signal Strength
The modem has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal
strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to another
position. Signal strength may depend on how close the modem is to a radio
base station. You must ensure that the location at which you intend to use
the modem, is within the network coverage area.
5.4.5 Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from
another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate vicinity.
More information about possible communication disturbances can be found
in section Possible Communication Disturbances
When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by issuing
the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”.
Tip! Before installing the modem, use an ordinary mobile
telephone to check a possible location for it. In determining
the location for the modem and antenna, you should consider
signal strength as well as cable length
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 42 of 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.3 Connection of Components to TT4031 (SE-GM29).
The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly
designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to be
exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly
installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in the
modem or equipment.
5.1.4 Network and Subscription
ꢀ
Before your application is used, you must ensure that your
chosen network provides the necessary telecommunication
services. Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary
information.
ꢀ
ꢀ
If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is
included in your (voice) subscription.
Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in
section “Short Message Service”.
5.2 How to Install the Modem
5.2.1 Power Supply
ꢀ Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This
ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the
allowed range, even during the maximum peak current.
ꢀ When the unit is powered from a battery or a high current supply,
connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the positive supply. This
protects the power cabling and modem.
5.2.2 Securing the modem
ꢀBefore securing the modem take into account the amount of
additional space required for the mating connectors and cables that
will be used in the application.
ꢀWhere access is restricted, it may be easier to connect all the cables
to the modem prior to securing it in the application.
ꢀSecurely attach the TT4031 (SE-GM29) modem to the host
application using two 3 mm diameter pan-head screws of
appropriate length as shown below.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 43 of 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ
Caution! Do not exceed a torque of 2.2 in lb (25 Ncm) when
tightening the fixings screws. Excessive torque applied to the
screws can crack the plastic case.
5.3 OEM Labeling
Where the TT4031 (SE-GM29) is to be incorporated into an end product it is
an FCC requirement that a label must be affixed to the outside of the end
product with a statement similar to the following: “This device contains TX
FCC ID: PY76220502-BV”.
5.4 Antenna
5.4.1 General
The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio link
between the network and the modem. Since the antenna transmits and
receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend on:
ꢀ the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);
ꢀ the placement of the antenna;
ꢀ communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna
operates.
In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna placement,
antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are addressed.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 44 of 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for
additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors, antenna
placement, and the surrounding area. You should also determine whether the
antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local antenna manufacturer might
be able to design a special antenna suitable for your the application.
5.4.2 Antenna Type
Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the modem.
Consider the following requirements:
ꢀ the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in
use: EGSM/GSM900/1800;
ꢀ the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50 Ω;
ꢀ the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 1 W;
ꢀ the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the
modem.
5.4.3 Antenna Placement
The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other
antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent antennas,
operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50 cm.
If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the
closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal
received by the modem.
The modem’s peak output power can reach 1 W. RF field strength varies with
antenna type and distance. At 10 cm from the antenna the field strength may
be up to 70 V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7 V/m.
5.4.4 The Antenna Cable
Use 50 Ω impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50 Ω impedance
connectors (frequency range up to 2 GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure that the
antenna cable is as short as possible.
The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the effectiveness
of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you use an adapter
between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it is crucial that the
antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.
Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each
additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 45 of 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.5 Possible Communication Disturbances
Possible communication disturbances include the following:
ꢀ Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.
ꢀ Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily
decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.
ꢀ Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio
signals caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can
be a particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are
thick and reinforced.
ꢀ Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal
strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and
reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such
as buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.
ꢀ Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the
GSM network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one
cell to the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with
communication and may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 46 of 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 Attachments
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) has been FCC certified using a number of
attachments including:
1._AC-DC Power Adaptor with Customized DC Lead
(Model # PS001)
Input 100-240 Va.c., 50/60Hz, 2m mains lead
Output: 12 Vd.c. 1.25 A, 2 m d.c. lead with RJ11 connector. CE marked.
2._Tri-band GSM Antenna (GSM/PCN/1.9GHz)
(Model # ANT016)
Covert fit spider patch antenna, self-adhesive pad, 0 dBi, 2 m RG174 cable
with FME female connector.
Please contact Topp Group, Inc. for product availability and placing orders.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 47 of 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Technical Data
Data Features
CSD
Up to 9.6 kbps
Up to 19.2 kbps
HSCSD (2+1)
GPRS Class B (4+1)
- P channels
85.6 kbps (subject to network support and
terminal location)
- Coding schemes CS1 - CS4
GSM
07.10 multiplexing protocol
Short Message Service Features
SMS
Text and PDU
Point to point (MT/MO)
Cell broadcast
concatenation of up to 6 SMS
Voice Features
Full Rate, Enhanced Full Rate and Half Rate
(FR/EFR/HR)
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF
AMR currently unsupported
Fax Features
Data Storage
Group 3
Class 1 and 2
SMS storage capacity
40 in ME
In addition, the unit can handle as many
SMS as the SIM can store
Phone book capacity
100
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 48 of 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Supply
Supply voltage range
5 - 32 V d.c.
Power Consumption
Supply voltage
5V
12V
32V
Vdc
Power Down Mode
Av
Max
Av
Max
Av
Max
5
15
5
15
20
50
µA
Standby Mode (typical)
Frequency
Paging rate
Av
Peak
Av
Peak
Av
Peak
900 MHz
2
2
26
26
110
120
9
9
43
45
6
6
20
19
mA
mA
1800 MHz
Talk Mode (typical)
Frequency
Power Level
Av
Peak
Av
Peak
Av
Peak
900 MHz
5
0
220
170
1230
960
90
70
520
350
40
30
200
140
mA
mA
1900 MHz
Note! Power Down Mode: DC power is applied but the modem
is switched OFF.
Standby Mode: The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is switched ON and camped on to the
network. No call in progress.
Talk Mode: The TT4031 (SE-GM29) is switched ON and a voice/data call is in
progress.
The power consumption during transmission in Talk Mode is measured at
maximum transmitted power.
The power consumption in Standby Mode is measured at the maximum
paging rate.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 49 of 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Specifications
Frequency range
TT4031 (SE-GM29): EGSM 900 MHz and 1800
MHz (dual band)
Maximum RF output
power
2 W (900 MHz) and 1 W (1800 MHz)
Antenna impedance
Static sensitivity
E-OTD
50 Ω
Better than –102 dBm
Currently unsupported in TT4031 (SE-GM29)
Audio Specifications
Parameter
Limit
Output level (differential)
≥4.0 Vpp
Output level (dynamic load = 32
)
≥2.8 Vpp
≤ 5 %
Distortion at 1 kHz and maximum output level
Offset, BEARP to BEARN
± 30 mV
≥40 dB
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation
Ear piece model
Impedance
Tolerance
Dynamic ear piece
Dynamic ear piece
Piezo ear piece
[32 Ω+ 800 µH] // 100 pF
[150 Ω+ 800 µH] // 100 pF
1 kΩ+ 60 nF
± 20 %
± 20 %
± 20 %
SIM Card Reader
Voltage type
Support for 3 V and 5 V SIM cards
Electrical Connectors and LED
Plug-in power supply
connector
RJ11 6-way
Handset audio connector
Antenna connector
RS232 port
RJ9 4-way
FME male
Sub-D socket, 9 pin
Green
LED
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 50 of 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mechanical Specification
Length
77.4 mm
66.4 mm
26.2 mm
< 130 g
Width
Height
Weight
Environmental specifications
Operating temperature
range
–25 °C to +55 °C
Storage temperature
range
–40 °C to +85 °C
Relative humidity
5 - 95 %, non-condensing
Stationary vibration,
sinusoidal
Displacement: 7.5 mm
Acceleration amplitude: 20 m/s² and 40 m/s²
Frequency range: 2-8 Hz, 8-200 Hz, 200-500
Hz
Stationary vibration,
random
Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):
0.96, 2.88, 0.96
Frequency range:
5-10 Hz, 10-200 Hz, 200-500 Hz, 60 min/axis
Non-stationary vibration, Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:
including shock
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
300 m/s², 11 ms
Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
1000 m/s², 6 ms
Bump
Acceleration: 250 m/s²
1.2 m
Free fall transportation
Rolling pitching
transportation
Angle: ±35 degrees; period: 8 s
Static load
10 kPa
Low air pressure/high air 70 kPa/106 kPa
pressure
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 51 of 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification
FCC Certification
Part 15
Part 22
Part 24
Approved to PTCRB according to NAPRD.03 and GSM 3GPP TS 51.010-1
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 52 of 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. FCC Certificate
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 53 of 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 3: Using AT Commands
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 54 of 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction to AT Commands
1.1 Overview
AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to control
and implement the functions of the modem.
Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:
ꢀ Control of DCE
ꢀ GPRS
ꢀ Call control
ꢀ Supplementary Service
ꢀ SIM application tool kit
The TT4031 (SE-GM29) contains a large number of Ericsson-specific
commands in addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and
ITU-T recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the
functions of the modem. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified by
the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description provided
below).
1.2 Syntax Description
This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the TT4031
(SE-GM29), AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for
additional information.
1.2.1 Conventions
In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT
commands.
<command> The name of the command that is to be entered.
<parameter>The parameter values that are defined for a certain
command.
<CR>
The command line is terminated by the Carriage Return
(or Enter key) or ATS3 command.
<LF>
Line feed character or ATS4 command.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 55 of 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
< >
[ ]
The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical
element. The brackets do not appear in the command
line.
Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item
is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a command
or an optional part of a response. The brackets do not
appear in the command line.
Value
The default values of the supported parameters are
indicated by using bold text when presenting the value.
Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘=’, parenthesis, etc., appear in commands
and responses as written.
The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and CMS
ERROR:<err> (see sections AT Response Syntax
are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each AT command.
OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.
1.2.2 AT Command Syntax
The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command is
made up of the following three elements:
ꢀ the prefix;
ꢀ the body;
ꢀ the termination character.
The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the first two
letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command, the
parameter, and if applicable the associated values.
Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces between
the individual bodies are ignored.
Basic Syntax Command
The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:
AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<OK>
Example!_ ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)
Additional commands may follow a command on the same command line
without any character being required for separation. For the command D
parameters, see the description for the command in question.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 56 of 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A version of the basic syntax is:
AT<command><parameter>
Extended Syntax Command
ꢀ AT+<command>= [<parameter>]
ꢀ AT*<command>=[<parameter>]
ꢀ EXAMPLE! - AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the modem)
If several values are included in the command, they are separated
by commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.
Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same
command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the preceeding
extended command as a separator.
Read Command Syntax
The read command is used to check the current values of
parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:
ꢀ AT+<command>?
ꢀ AT*<command>?
ꢀ AT<command>?
Example!_ AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)
<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)
<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)
Test Command Syntax
The test command is used to test whether the command has been
implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it
contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:
ꢀ AT+<command>=?
ꢀ AT*<command>=?
Example!_ AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the
response parameters)
<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)
<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 57 of 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR is
issued.
ꢀ
NOTE! - Possible responses are indicated both as
<command>:(list of supported<parameter>) and (in most
cases) the actual range of the parameter values.
1.2.3 AT Response Syntax
The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the command
V for further details.
Possible formats for the result codes are:
ꢀ Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also
has a numerical equivalent.
ꢀ Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an
asterisk (*):
–_AT+<command>: <parameter >
–_AT*<command>: <parameter>
where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single space
character separates the colon character from the <parameter>.If several
values are included in the result code, they are separated by commas. It
is also possible that a result code has no value. The extended syntax
result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are always issued in
alphabetical form.
ꢀ Information text response may contain multiple lines separated
by <CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses
by looking for a final result code response, such as OK.
There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:
Final Result Code
A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is
completed and another command may be issued.
ꢀ If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the
result code OK.
ꢀ If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which
had the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result
code. It is ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR
followed by an error code.
Final result codes are:
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 58 of 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Value
OK
General meaning
Command executed, no errors
Invalid command or command line too long
ERROR
NO DIALTONE No dialing possible, wrong mode
BUSY
Remote station busy
NO ANSWER
NO CARRIER
Connection completion time-out
Link not established or disconnected
Unsolicited Result Code
Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly
associated with a command being issued from the TE.
1.3 Error Codes
1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)
This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If +CME
ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a command
line, none of the commands in the same command line will be executed
(neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a
completed command line execution). The format of <err> can be either
numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE command.
The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.
<err>
Description Syntax
0
Phone failure
1
No connection to phone
Phone -adaptor link reserved
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM not inserted
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 59 of 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
SIM busy
15
SIM wrong
16
Incorrect password
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
Memory full
17
18
20
21
Invalid index
22
Not found
23
Memory failure
24
Text string too long
Invalid characters in text string
Dial string too long
Invalid characters in dial string
No network service
Network time-out
Network not allowed - emergency calls only
Unknown
25
26
27
30
31
32
100
101- 255
Reserved by ETS
1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)
This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or to the
network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code. None of the
following commands in the same command line will be executed. Neither
ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR is returned normally when
an error is related to syntax or invalid parameters. Nevertheless, it always
appears when a command fails.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 60 of 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The syntax is as follows:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.
<err>
Description
0 - 127
128 - 255
300
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values
ME failure
301
SMS service of ME reserved
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
Invalid PDU mode parameter
Invalid text mode parameter
SIM not inserted
302
303
304
305
310
311
SIM PIN required
312
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM failure
313
314
SIM busy
315
SIM wrong
316
SIM PUK required
317
SIM PIN2 required
318
SIM PUK2 required
320
Memory failure
321
Invalid memory index
Memory full
322
330
SMSC address unknown
No network service
331
332
Network time-out
340
No +CNMA acknowledgment expected
Unknown error
500
- 511
512-
Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved
Manufacturer specific
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 61 of 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands
After every group of AT commands there is a section where some of the more
complicated commands are exemplified. For a detailed description of the
command in question (valid parameter values, AT command syntax and
Response syntax) you are recommended to see its own descriptive section.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 62 of 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Control
2.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
2.2 ATA Answer Incoming Call
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Answer an incoming call ATA
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
•_OK
Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.
<text>
Description
19200
9600
4800
2400
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 63 of 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 ATD Dial
Description
Command
Possible Responses
ATD<dial_string>[;]
•_Originate a call and
dial the phone
number specified in
the command as
<dial_string>
or
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
•_NO DIAL TONE
•_BUSY
•_Do a network detect
•_OK
Dial the phone number ATD>ME<I>[;]
stored in the mobile
phone which is located
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
by the index <I>
•_NO DIAL TONE
•_BUSY
•_OK
Dial the phone number ATD>SM<I>[;]
stored in the SIM card
which is located by the
index <I>
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
•_NO DIAL TONE
•_BUSY
•_OK
Dial the phone number ATD>LD<I>[;]
stored in the Last dialled
number list on the SIM
card, which is located by
the index <I>
The most recently
dialled number is
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
•_NO DIAL TONE
•_BUSY
assumed to have
<I>="1"
•_OK
Redial the last phone
number dialled.
ATDL[;]
...
Ericsson specific
Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone
number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish the
connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number
specification.
If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that the
number is a voice rather than a data number.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 64 of 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command
instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK is
returned.
Abortability:
Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE
to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be sufficient to abort the
command in progress; however, characters transmitted during the first 125
milliseconds after transmission of the termination character are ignored. This
is to allow the DTE to append additional control characters such as line feed
after the command line termination character.
<dial_string> Description
“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Valid characters for origination
8 9 * # +”
W
The W modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
,
The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
T
P
The T modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
The P modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
<Final Result
Code>
Description
CONNECT
If connection is successfully established, only valid for
data connections
CONNECT
<text>
If connection is successfully established, only valid for
data connections
NO CARRIER
Unable to establish a connection or the connection
attempt was aborted by the user
ERROR
An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish
the connection
NO DIALTONE The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not
within coverage of the network
BUSY
The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and
voice connections
OK
Only valid for voice connections
<text>
Description
19200
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 65 of 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9600
4800
2400
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s
2.4 ATH Hang up
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Terminate the call
ATH
•_ERROR
•_OK
Signals the MS to terminate an active call.
2.5 ATO Return to Online Data Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Return to on-line data ATO[<value>]
mode
•_CONNECT
•_CONNECT <text>
•_NO CARRIER
•_ERROR
Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during an
active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.
<value>
Description
0
Return to on-line data state from on-line command
2.6 ATP Select Pulse Dialing
Description
Command
ATP
Possible Responses
Select pulse dialing
OK
OK
Show if the command is ATP=?
supported?
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 66 of 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would
normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling the number.
2.7 ATT Select Tone Dialing
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Select tone dialing
ATT
OK
OK
Show if the command is ATT=?
supported?
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would
normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling the number.
2.8 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set call progress
monitoring control
ATX=[<n>] or
ATX[<n>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATX?
X: <n>
Show if the command is ATX=?
supported?
X: (list of supported
<n>s)
Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used
during a call set-up.
<n>
Description
0
Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported
on connection
1
2
3
4
Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on
connection
Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line
speed on connection
Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on
connection
Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line speed
on connection. Default value
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 67 of 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ NOTE! - If there is no network available the <n>
parameter will decide if “NO DIALTONE” or “NO
CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient is
busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or
“NO CARRIER” will be returned.
2.9 AT+CHUP Hang up Call
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request hang-up
AT+CHUP
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the commands AT+CHUP=?
is supported
•_ERROR
Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.
If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming call
shall be rejected.
2.10 AT+CMOD Call Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request Call Mode
AT+CMOD=[<mode>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_+CMOD: <mode>
•_OK
Shows the current
setting
AT+CMOD?
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMOD=?
supported
•_+CMOD: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects the call mode of further dialling commands (D) or for next answering
command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In this ETS, terms
“alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all GSM bearer and
teleservices that incorporate more than one basic service (voice, data, fax)
within one call.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 68 of 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up procedures are
similar to procedures specified in ITU-T Recommendations V.25ter, T.31 and
T.32. In GSM there can be voice followed by data (refer to GSM 02.02),
alternating voice/data (refer to GSM 02.02) and alternating voice/fax calls
(refer to GSM 02.03).
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
ꢀ NOTE! - +CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed
alternating mode call. It is set to zero also after a failed
answering. The power-up, factory (&F) and user resets (Z),
also set the value to zero. This reduces the possibility that
alternating mode calls are originated or answered
accidentally.
<mode>
Description
0
Single mode. Default value.
In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of
alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following
cases:
- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;
- after a unsuccessful answering;
- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z
Note!_
2.11 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Command
+CVHU=[<mode>]
+CVHU?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Read command
•_+CVHU: <mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Test if the command is +CVHU=?
supported
+CVHU: (list of
supported <mode>s)
Selects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to be
disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode calls
that are currently in voice mode.
ꢀ NOTE! - When <mode>=2, this command must be
viewed in conjunction with the V.25ter command &D, or
&D will be ignored.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 69 of 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<mode>
Description
0
“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATH
disconnects
1
2
“Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given
“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATH
disconnects. Default value
Note!_
2.12 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request transmission of AT+VTS=<DTMF>
DTMF tone(s)
OK
ERROR
Show if the command is AT+VTS=?
supported
OK
ERROR
This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones may be
used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording period. The
command is write only. In this profile of commands, the command does not
operate in data or fax modes of operation (+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).
ꢀ NOTE! - The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is
not possible to generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the
ATD command.
ꢀ NOTE! - The AT+VTS command is used only during a
voice call.
<DTMF>
Description
ASCII character An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #,
string
*, A-D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted
as a single ASCII character.
Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”
followed by “9”
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 70 of 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control and Status
3.1 ATQ Result Code Suppression
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Result Code
Suppression
ATQ[=]<value>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATQ?
Q: <value>
Show if the command is ATQ=?
supported
Q: (list of supported
<value>s)
Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE. When
result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate, final, or
unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or trailer - is
transmitted.
<value>
Description
0
1
DCE transmits result codes. Default value
Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
3.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Automatic answer
control
ATS0=[<rcnt>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS0?
<rcnt>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS0=?
S0: (list of supported
<rcnt>s)
Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero value
specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.
Note! Call is always answered in the current fax class,
regardless of whether the incoming call is voice, data, or
fax.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 71 of 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<rcnt>
Description
0
Disable automatic answer. Default value
1-7
Answer after the specified number of rings
3.3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set escape sequence
character
ATS2=[<esc>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATS2
<esc>
Show if the command is ATS2=?
supported
S2: (list of supported
<esc>s)
Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when
switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The response to
the command is modified to reflect the change.
<esc>
Description
43
Escape sequence character. Default value
0 to 255
Escape sequence character
ꢀ NOTE! - If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the
range of 128-255, the escape sequence detection is
disabled.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 72 of 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Command Line
Termination Character
ATS3=<value>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATS3?
<value>
Show if the command is ATS3=?
supported
S3: (list of supported
<value>s)
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line.
It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator
for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter.
The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination
character for entry of the command line containing the S3 setting command.
However, the result code issued uses the value of S3 as set during the
processing of the command line. For example, if S3 was previously set to 13
and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued, the command line is terminated
with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but the result code issued uses the
character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/14) in place of the <CR>.
<value>
Description
13
Command line termination character, Default value
0 to 127
Command line termination character
3.5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Response
Formatting Character
ATS4=<value>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATS4?
<value>
Show if the command is ATS4=?
supported
S4: (list of supported
<value>s)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 73 of 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result
codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the description
of the V parameter for usage).
If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued in
response to that command line will use the new value of S4.
<value>
Description
10
Formatting character. Default value
Note: ASCII character 10 is equivalent to <LF>
0 to 127
Formatting character
3.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request Command Line ATS5=<value>
Editing Character
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows the current
setting
ATS5?
<value>
Show if the command is ATS5=?
supported
S5: (list of supported
<value>s)
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the
immediately preceding character.
<value>
Description
8
Line editing character. Default value
0 to 127
Line editing character
3.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 74 of 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blind dial delay control ATS6=[<dly>]
Read the current setting ATS6?
OK
<dly>
Show if the command is ATS6=?
supported
S6: (list of supported
<dly>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality
<dly>
Description
2
Wait two seconds before blind dialing. Default value
2-255
Number of seconds to wait before blind dialing
3.8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set connection
completion timeout
ATS7=[<tmo>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATS7?
<tmo>
Show if the command is ATS7=?
supported
S7: (list of supported
<tmo>s)
Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and the
connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the connection is
aborted.
<tmo>
Description
50
Timeout value in seconds. Default value
1-255
Timeout value in seconds
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 75 of 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATS8
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Comma Dial
Modifier Delay Control
ATS8=[<dly>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current
setting.
ATS8?
<dly>
Show if the command is ATS8=?
supported.
S8: (list of supported
<dly>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality
<dly>
Description
2
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value
1-255
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds
3.10 ATS10
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Automatic
Disconnect Delay
Control
ATS10=[<val>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATS10?
<val>
Show if the command is ATS10=?
supported
S10: (list of supported
<val>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality
<val>
Description
2
Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value
1-254
Number of tenths of a second of delay
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 76 of 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Call Monitoring on AT*ECAM=<onoff>
or off
•_OK
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current status AT*ECAM?
for Call Monitoring
•_*ECAM: <onoff>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*ECAM=?
supported
•_*ECAM: list of
supported <onoff>s
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in the ME.
When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs about call
events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.
It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result code
*ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is two fold:
ꢀ to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;
ꢀ to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for
an ongoing call.
<onoff>
Description
0
1
The call log function is disabled (off). Default value
The call log function is enabled (on)
•_
Examples
AT*ECAM?
*ECAM: 0
AT*ECAM=1
OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 77 of 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Daylight Saving
Time
AT*EDST=<dst>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read current Daylight
Saving Time
AT*EDST?
•_*EDST: <dst>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*EDST=?
supported
•_*EDST: (list of
supported <dst>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command sets the daylight saving time hours.
ꢀ NOTE! - This command affects the MS clock set with the
AT+CCLK command. To avoid confusion it is
recommended the daylight saving time (DST) is set
with this command before setting the actual local time
with AT+CCLK.
<dst>
Description
0
1
2
Standard time
Daylight saving time, +1 hour
Daylight saving time, +2 hours
Note!_
3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 78 of 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perform a master reset AT*EMAR=<phone lock
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
in the MS
code>
•_ERROR
Shows if the command AT*EMAR=?
is supported or not
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the MS
will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the MS.
<phone lock code>
Description
String
Security code (phone lock code) must be verified
before performing the master reset, see also
AT+CLCK
3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event
Description
Command
AT*EPEE=<onoff>
Possible Responses
Requests the MS to
inform when the PIN
code has been inserted
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EPEE=?
supported
•_*EPEE: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current status AT*EPEE?
for PIN Code Request
•_*EPEE: <onoff>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been
inserted and accepted.
<onoff>
Description
0
Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated
(off). Default value
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 79 of 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)
3.15 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set the real time clock AT+CCLK=<time>
of the ME
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CCLK?
•_+CCLK: <time>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CCLK=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME
ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting of the
clock.
<time>
Description
string type
value
Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour,
minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time
and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994,
22:10:00 GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information
then the three last characters of <time> are not returned
by +CCLK?
3.16 AT+CEER Extended Error Report
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request an Extended
Error Report
AT+CEER
•_+CEER: <report>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 80 of 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the command is AT+CEER=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.
Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure
information given by the GSM network in text format.
<report>
Description
characters
The total number of characters, including line
terminators, in the information text shall not exceed
2041 characters.
Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
3.17 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set MS functionality
AT+CFUN=<fun>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show the current
setting
AT+CFUN?
•_+CFUN: <fun>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command AT+CFUN=?
is supported
•_+CFUN: (list of
supported <fun>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS.
"Full functionality" results in the highest level of power usage. It is possible to
activate all parts of the modem. Default ON state.
"Minimum functionality" results in minimum power usage. The modem is in a
powered OFF state. No functionality can be executed until the modem is
powered back ON.
Transitions between states are defined below.
Initial State New State Function
<fun> = 0
-
Modem is off. No functionality
<fun> = 1 <fun> = 0 Modem was fully active. Active calls are hung
up and an IMSI detach is sent. The modem
then powers off
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 81 of 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<fun>
Description
0
1
Minimum functionality. Modem is OFF
Full functionality. Modem is ON
3.18 AT+CIND Indicator Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Indicator Control AT+CIND=[<ind>
[,<ind>[,…]]]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CIND?
•_+CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command AT+CIND=?
is supported
•_+CIND: (<descr>,(list of
supported <ind>s)),
(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s)),…
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the
indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1 means
that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than “off” state), 2
is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a simple on/off style
element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of elements is ME specific. If the
ME does not allow setting of indicators or it is not currently reachable, +CME
ERROR: <err> is returned. If a certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be
set. If the parameter is an empty field, the indicator will keep the previous
value.
Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum 16
character description of the indicator and compound value is the allowed
values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR:
<err> is returned (refer to GSM 07.07).
<ind>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 82 of 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer type
Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>
<descr>
Description
“signal”
“service”
“sounder”
“message”
“call”
Signal quality (0-5)
Service availability (0-1)
Sounder activity (0-1)
Message received (0-1)
Call in progress (0-1)
Roaming indicator (0-1)
“roam”
“sms full”
A short message memory storage in the MT has become
full (1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the
range is (0-1)
3.19 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands
Command
Possible Responses
+CLAC
<AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[…]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CLAC=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. This command
has the same functionality as AT*.
ꢀ NOTE! - This command only returns the AT commands
that are available to the user.
3.20 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request GSM Mobile
Equipment Error Control
AT+CMEE=[<n>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
AT+CMEE?
•_+CMEE: <n>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 83 of 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMEE=?
supported
•_+CMEE: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an
indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When enabled,
ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the
regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is returned normally when error is
related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA functionality. For more
information, refer to “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”.
<n>
Description
0
Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR
instead. Default value
1
2
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric
<err> values
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose
<err> values
3.21 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set phone activity AT+CMER=[<mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
status
[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]
•_ERROR
Read the current AT+CMER?
setting
•_+CMER:
<mode>,<ind>,<bfr>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CMER=?
•_+CMER: (list of supported
<mode>s), (list of supported
<ind>s), (list of supported
<bfr>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 84 of 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from ME to TE in
the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state changes.
<mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within
this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1,
2 or 3 is entered. If the ME does not support setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is
returned.
<mode>
Description
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code
buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place
or the oldest ones can be discarded
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result codes
and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<ind>
Description
0
1
No indicator event reporting
Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:
<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order
number (as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new
value of indicator. Only those indicator events, which are
not caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the
TE
<bfr>
Description
0
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this
command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered
3.22 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Execute Phone Activity AT+CPAS[=<mode>]
Status
•_+CPAS: <pas>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 85 of 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the command is AT+CPAS=?
supported
•_+CPAS:
(list of supported
<pas>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the
ME before requesting action from the phone.
When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the
command returns <pas>-values from 0 to 128 (for supported values se table
1 below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with the
<mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson specific
<pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the table below).
Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound value:
refer to GSM 07.07.
<pas>
Description
0
3
Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)
Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the
ringer is active)
4
Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE,
but a call is in progress)
129
In idle state, (operator name/clock/date). This state is a
sub-state to ‘ready’ (0) and has the following definition:
In Idle state, that is, operator, clock and date (is set)
shown on the display
No conversation or data call in progress
No sub-menus shown on the display
4 Only digits, clear, *, NO and # allowed in this mode,
not changing mode
Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to
‘call in progress’
130
131
Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to
‘call in progress’
<mode>
Description
1
Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,
such as 129, 130 and 131
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 86 of 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.23 AT+CPIN PIN Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request PIN Control
AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new
pin>]
•_+CME ERROR:
<err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CPIN?
•_+CPIN: <code>
•_+CME ERROR:
<err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CPIN=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR:
<err>
•_+CPIN: (supported
<code>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME
operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered twice,
the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is pending, no action
is taken towards the ME and an error message (+CME ERROR <err>) is
returned to the TE.
If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,
<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.
ꢀ NOTE! - Commands which interact with the ME that are
accepted when the ME has a pending request for SIM
PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI, +CGMM, +CGMR,
+CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.
<pin>,<newpin>
Description
string
The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 -
8 digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits
Note!_
<code>
Description
READY
ME is not pending for any password
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 87 of 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIM PIN
ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given
SIM PUK
PH-SIM PIN
SIM PIN2
ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given
ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given
ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is
recommended to be returned only when the last
executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered
correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME
does not block its operation
SIM PUK2
ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is
recommended to be returned only when the last
executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are
not entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended
that ME does not block its operation.
BLOCKED
The SIM cards is blocked for the user
Note!_
<err>
Description
0
Phone failure
5
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24
25
100
SIM busy
SIM wrong
Incorrect password
Text string too long
Invalid characters in text string
Unknown
Note!_
3.24 AT+CPWD Change Password
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 88 of 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Request facility lock
AT+CPWD=<fac>,
<oldpwd>,
<newpwd>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CPWD=?
supported
•_+CPWD:
(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),
(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),
…
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command
Facility Lock +CLCK.
Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities and
the maximum length of their password.
<fac>
Description
“PS”
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password
when other than current SIM card inserted)
“SC”
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up
and when this lock command issued)
“P2”
SIM PIN2
“AO”
BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause
1)
“OI”
BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM
02.88 clause 1)
“AI”
“IR”
BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause
2)
BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the
home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)
“OX”
BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to
Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)
“AB”
“AG”
“AC”
All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
<oldpwd>
Description
string type
<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for
the facility from the ME user interface or with the change
password command, +CPWD
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 89 of 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<newpwd>
Description
string type
<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of
password can be determined with <pwdlength>
<pwdlength> Description
Integer type
Maximum length of the password for the facility
<err>
Description
0
Phone failure
3
Operation not allowed
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
23
24
100
101..255
SIM busy
SIM wrong
Incorrect password
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
Text string too long
Invalid characters in text string
Unknown
Reserved by ETS
3.25 AT+CR
Service Reporting Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Service Reporting
Control
AT+CR=<mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 90 of 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read current setting
AT+CR?
•_+CR: <mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CR=?
supported
•_+CR: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports during
the handshake phase.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Disable reporting. Default value
Enable reporting
Intermediate Result Codes:
+CR: <serv>
3.26 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Cellular Result Code AT+CRC=[<mode>]
option
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_+CRC: <mode>
•_OK
Show the current
setting
AT+CRC?
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CRC=?
supported
•_+CRC: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Command controls whether or not;
ꢀ the extended format of incoming call indication;
ꢀ or GPRS network request for PDP context activation;
ꢀ or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 91 of 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result
code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Disables extended format
Enables extended format
Unsolicited Result Codes:
+CRING: <type>
3.27 AT+CSAS Save Settings
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Save Settings
AT+CSAS[=<profile>]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Get available
profiles
AT+CSAS=?
•_+CSAS: (list of supported
<profile>s)
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA can
contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands Service
Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell
Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are saved. Certain
settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM SMS parameters)
and therefore can not be saved.
Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading and
writing of settings.
<profile>
Description
0..255
Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are
to be stored. Default value is 0
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 92 of 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 AT+CSQ Signal Strength
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Execute Signal Strength AT+CSQ
•_+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CSQ=?
supported
•_+CSQ: (list of
supported
<rssi>s),(list of
supported <ber>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error
rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported by the TA
as compound values.
<rssi>
Description
0
–113dBm or less
–111dBm
1
2..30
31
99
–109… –53dBm
–51dBm or greater
Not known or not detectable
<ber>
Description
0..7
As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause
8.2.4
99
Not known or not detectable
3.29 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 93 of 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enable and disable
automatic time zone
update via NITZ
AT+CTZU=<onoff>
AT+CTZU?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read current setting
•_+CTZU: <onoff>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CTZU=?
supported
•_+CTZU: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If setting fails
in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.
<onoff>
Description
0
The automatic time zone update is disabled (off).
Default value
1
The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 94 of 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio
AT*E2EAMS and AT*E2APR are new commands that replace the funtionality
offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM commands. Use the new
commands in new applications. The old commands are included for
compatibility.
4.1 AT*E2EAMSEricsson M2M Audio Profile Modification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request
operation
with audio
profile
AT*E2EAMS=
<op>[,<TxPGA>,
•_ERROR
•_OK
<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,<
AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]
AT*E2EAMS?
Display set
profile
•_*E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT*E2EAMS=?
•_*E2EAMS:
(list of supported <op>s)
•_ERROR
This command allows the modification and configuration of the current audio
profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines the way in
which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch setting are
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 95 of 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
configured. There are several audio profiles available in non-volatile storage,
and the current profile can be modified by use of the AT*E2APR command.
The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:
ꢀ configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a
comma separated list;
ꢀ set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;
ꢀ save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current
profile number (see AT*E2APR).
The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read
command AT*E2EAMS?
Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.
Abortability:
This command may not be aborted.
Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio circuit are
affected by the various parameters.
Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC
<op>
Description
0
Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 96 of 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Set <TxPGA>
2
Set <RxPGA>
3
Set <SideToneGain>
Set <AuxInGain>
Set <MicInGain>
Set <TxAGC>
4
5
6
7
Set <Volume>
8
Set <MaxVolume>
Set <MicPath>
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
255
Set <SpkPath>
Set <TxPCM>
Set <RxPCM>
Set <HFAlgorithm>
Set <LocalAudio>
Set <TxGainLow>
Set <MicVolt2V>
Set <SideTone>
Set <NoiseRed>
Set <EchoCancel>
Set <AnalogRing>
Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current
profile number
<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-5 dB PGA gain
-2.5 dB PGA gain
0 dB PGA gain
2.5 dB PGA gain
5 dB PGA gain
7.5 dB PGA gain
–7.5 dB PGA gain
–10 dB PGA gain
<SideToneGain> Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 97 of 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
2
3
4
5
10 dB
13 dB
16 dB
19 dB
22 dB
25 dB
<AuxInputGain> Description
0
1
2
3
MUTE
13 dB
34 dB
46 dB
<MicInputGain> Description
0
MUTE
1
13 dB
2
25 dB
3
34 dB
4
46 dB
<TxAGCGain>
Description
0
1
2
0 dB
3 dB
6 dB
<Volume>,
Description
<MaxVolume>
0
MUTE
1-9
Volume levels 1-9
Description
<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>
0
1
2
3
OFF
MUTE
Internal (using microphone/speaker)
External (using ATMS/AFMS)
Description
<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 98 of 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
13 bit PCM
16 bit PCM
<HFAlgorithm> Description
0
No handsfree
1
Advanced handsfree
Switching handsfree
No handsfree handheld
No handsfree external
Description
2
3
4
<LocalAudio>
0
Local audio mode off
1
Local audio microphone/no speaker
Local audio no microphone/speaker
Local audio microphone/speaker
Description
2
3
<TxGainLow>
0
Tx gain normal
Tx gain –7 dB
Description
1
<MicVolt2V>
0
1
Microphone voltage at 2.5 V
Microphone voltage at 2 V
Description
<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
0
1
OFF
ON
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 99 of 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
AT*E2EAMS=?
*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)
OK
Current default profile is 0:
AT*E2EAMS?
*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1
OK
Sets current profile with these settings:
AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1
OK
Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:
AT*E2EAMS=1,2
OK
Turns analog ringing off:
AT*E2EAMS=20,0
OK
Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:
AT*E2EAMS=255
OK
4.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request operation AT*E2APR=
with audio profile <op>[,<prnum1>
•_ERROR
•_OK
[,<prnum2>]]
•_*E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,
<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 100 of 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display currently
set profile
AT*E2APR?
•_ *E2APR: current <prnum>
•_ ERROR
Shows if the
command is
supported
AT*E2APR=?
•_*E2APR: (list of supported
<op>s), (list of supported
<prnum1>s), (list of supported
<prnum2>s)
•_ERROR
This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio “profiles”
stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd parameters depend on
the operation being carried out.
Using the command you can:
ꢀSet one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.
This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.
ꢀRead one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile
number defined will be displayed.
ꢀCopy all parameters from one profile into another.
ꢀReset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for
the profile:
ꢀ 0 is the handset profile,
ꢀ 1 is the portable handsfree profile,
ꢀ 2 is the car kit profile.
ꢀSet a profile as the default profile on next power up.
•_
<op>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
Set profile <prnum1> to set as current
Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>
Read profile <prnum1> settings
Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default
Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as
defautl profile in NVM, and use it as default from next
power on
•_
<prnum1>,
<prnum2>
Description
0
1
2
Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default value
Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)
Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 101 of 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_
Examples
AT*E2APR=?
*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)
OK
Current default profile is profile 0:
AT*E2APR?
*E2APR: 0
OK
Set audio profile now used to profile 1:
AT*E2APR=0,1
OK
Audio profile 1 settings:
AT*E2APR=1,1
*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
OK
Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:
AT*E2APR=2,1,2
OK
Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current audio
paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:
AT*E2APR=3,1
OK
Sets profile number 1 as the default when modem is powered on:
AT*E2APR=4,1
OK
4.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request the audio lines AT*EALR=<mode>
•_*EALR: <mode>,
(ATMS,AFMS)
[,<activation>
[,<aud_status>]]
<activation>,<resp>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT*EALR?
Rev 1.0
*EALR:
<mode>,<activation>,
<resp>
Owner’s Manual
Page 102 of 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show list of supported AT*EALR=?
parameters
*EALR:(list of supported
<mode>s,
<activation>s and
<aud_status>s
parameters)
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<mode>
Description
0
1
2
3
No request for ATMS or AFMS
Request ATMS and not AFMS
Request AFMS and not ATMS
Request ATMS and AFMS
<activation>
Description
0
Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless
portable hands free)
1
Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands free)
<aud_status> Description
0
1
No change of the audio status
Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both
the audio lines and the call to the phone
2
Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the
audio lines and the call
<resp>
Description
0
1
2
3
Disable ATMS and AFMS
Enable ATMS and disable AFMS
Disable ATMS and enable AFMS
Enable ATMS and AFMS
4.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 103 of 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sets the audio AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al
•_OK
mode for the
application
g>[,<noise_reduction>
[,<side tone>
•_ERROR
[,<short_echo_canceling>
[,<ATMS_gain>
[,<class>
[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>
[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>]]]]]]]
AT*EAMS?
Show the
current audio
mode setting
*EAMS:<internal_voice_alg
>, <noise_reduction>,
<side_tone>,
<short_echo_canceling>,
<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<A
TMS_sensitivity_deviation_
from_class>,<AFMS_sensit
ivity_deviation_from_class
>
*EAMS: (list of supported
<internal_voice_alg >s,
<noise_reduction>s,
<side_tone>s,
Show list of
supported
services
AT*EAMS=?
<short_echo_canceling>s,
<AFMS_gain>s>,
<class>s,
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>s,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<internal_voice_alg>
Description
0
1
2
None
Semi Duplex
Full Duplex
(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the
MS contains echo cancelling)
<noise_reduction>
Description
0
1
Off
On
<side_tone>
Description
0
1
Off
On
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 104 of 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<short_echo_canceling>
Description
0
1
Off
On
<ATMS_gain>
Description
0
Normal (0 dB) (internal voice processing)
<Class>
Description
None
0
1
2
3
Low end, class reference Hector
Mid End, class reference Scott
High End, class reference Hasse
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class Description
>,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_cla
ss>
0
1
2
3
4
0 dB
2,5 dB
–2,5 dB
5,0 dB
–5,0 dB
4.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request analogue ring
signal in the loudspeaker
AT*EARS=<mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current mode
setting
AT*EARS?
*EARS: <mode>
Show list of supported
modes
AT*EARS=?
*EARS: (list of
supported <mode>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 105 of 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Disable analogue ring signal
Enable analogue ring signal
4.6 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set local audio mode
AT*ELAM=<mic>
[,<loudspeaker>]
•_*ELAM: <mic>,
<loudspeaker>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
service setting
AT*ELAM?
*ELAM:
<mic>,<loudspeaker>
Show list of supported AT*ELAM=?
parameters
*ELAM: (list of
supported <mic>s and
<loudspeaker>s
parameters)
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<mic>
Description
0
1
Off
Microphone analogue
<loudspeaker>
Description
0
1
Off
Loudspeaker analogue
4.7 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 106 of 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enables/disables the
phone microphone
AT*EMIC=<mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EMIC=?
supported, show
supported values
•_*EMIC: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current
settings
AT*EMIC?
•_*EMIC: <mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Microphone is disabled (off)
Microphone is enabled (on)
4.8 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request for mute
indications
AT*EMIR=<mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show supported
message types along
with the current service
setting
AT*EMIR?
*EMIR:
<mode>,<resp>
Show list of supported AT*EMIR=?
services
*EMIR: (list of
supported <mode>s)
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<mode>
Description
0
Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to
the accessory
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 107 of 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the
accessory
<resp>
Description
0
1
Music mute inactive
Music mute active
4.9 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Sets the maximum
volume level on the
audio lines
AT*EXVC=<external
volume>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EXVC=?
supported and show the
possible report settings
•_*EXVC: (list of
supported <external
volume>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT*EXVC?
•_*EXVC: <external
volume>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle
handsfree controls the audio volume.
By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over AFMS is
controlled by the phone MMI.
The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is
connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once the
phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume> setting
returns to default.
<external volume> Description
0
The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 108 of 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum
level that is no clipping occurs. An external
accessory such as a vehicle kit controls the actual
volume level heard by the user
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 109 of 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data - CSD/HSCSD
ꢀ NOTE! - Since the modem does not support V42bis
compression the following commands have not been
implemented:
•_AT+DS
•_AT+DR
5.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Select bearer service
type
AT+CBST=[<speed>
,
[<name>,[<ce>]]]
AT+CBST?
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
•_+CBST:
<speed>,<name>,
<ce>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CBST=?
supported
•_+CBST: (list of
supported <speed>s,list
of supported <name>s,
list of supported <ce>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the
connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. Values
may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup, especially in the
case of single numbering scheme calls.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.
<speed>
Description
0
4
6
7
Auto selection of baud rate
2400 bps V.22bis
4800 bps V.32
9600 bps V.32
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 110 of 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
15
68
70
71
75
79
80
81
82
83
9600 bps V.34
19200 bps V.34
2400 bps V.110 (ISDN)
4800 bps V.110 (ISDN)
9600 bps V.110 (ISDN)
14400 bps V.110 (ISDN)
19200 bps V.110 (ISDN)
28800 bps V.110 (ISDN)
38400 bps V.110 (ISDN)
48000 bps V.110 (ISDN)
56000 bps V.110 (ISDN)
<name>
Description
0
Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1 kHz modem)
<ce>
Description
1
Non transparent
5.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set radio link
protocol
AT+CRLP=[<iws>
[,<mws>[,<T1>
[,<N2>[,<ver>
[, <T4>]]]]]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the
command
AT+CRLP?
•_+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<v
er1> [,<T4>]][<CR><LF>
•_+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<v
er2> [,<T4>]][...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 111 of 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CRLP=?
•_+CRLP: (list of supported
<iws>s), (list of supported
<mws>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of
supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>
[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]
[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of
supported <iws>s), (list of
supported <mws>s), (list of
supported <T1>s), (list of
supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list
of supported <T4>s)]][...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data calls
are originated may be altered with this command. Available command
subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by the device (e.g.
<ver> may not be available if device supports only versions 0 and 1).
Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version
<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx> are
returned.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. If
ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP parameter value
ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.
<iws>
Description
120
IWF to MS window size
0 - 496
<mws>
Description
120
MS to IWF window size
0 - 496
<T1>
Description
48
Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10 ms)
38 - 100
<N2>
Description
6
Re-transmission attempts N2
0 - 255
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 112 of 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<T4>
Description
5
Re-sequencing period T4 (*10 ms)
3 - 255
<ver>
Description
Integer
RLP version. When version indication is not present,
<ver>=0 is assumed
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 113 of 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data - GPRS
6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Activate or deactivate
the specified PDP
context(s)
+CGACT=[<state>
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
+CGACT?
•_+CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[<CR><LF>
+CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGACT=?
supported
•_+CGACT: (list of
supported <state>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).
After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state.
If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and OK is
returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR or +CME: ERROR
is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS service when the activation
form of the command is executed, the MS first performs a GPRS attach and
then attempts to activate the specific contexts.
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates all
defined contexts.
If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates
all active contexts.
<state>
Description
0
1
PDP context activation deactivated
PDP context activation activated
<cid>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 114 of 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer type
A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP
context definition
6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Attach or detach MS to +CGATT=[<state>]
the GPRS/packet
domain/packet domain
service
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
+CGATT?
•_+CGATT: <state>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGATT=?
supported
•_+CGATT: (list of
supported <state>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet domain
service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250
command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is
ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be
achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error
responses (enabled by the +CMEE command) are listed under “+CME ERROR
(Mobile Equipment Error Code)”.
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the
attachment state changes to detached.
ꢀ This command has the characteristics of both the V.250
action and parameter commands. Hence it has the read
form in addition to the execution/set and test forms.
<state>
Description
0
1
Detached
Attached
Note!_
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 115 of 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3 AT+CGDATA
Enter Data State
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Establish GPRS/packet +CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid[
•_CONNECT
•_ERROR
•_OK
domain connection
,cid>[,…]]]]
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGDATA=?
supported
•_+CGDATA: (list of
supported <L2P>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish
communication between the TE and the network using one or more
GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS/packet
domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.
<L2P>
Description
PPP
Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Select PDP
context
parameters
+CGDCONT=[<cid>
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>
[,<PDP_addr>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
[,<d_comp>
•_ERROR
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>
[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]
+CGDCONT?
Read the
command
•_+CGDCONT: <cid>,
<PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]
] [<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]
] [...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 116 of 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the
command is
supported
+CGDCONT=?
•_+CGDCONT: (range of
supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of
supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported <pd1>s)
[,…[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
(range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of
supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported
<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]] [...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>.
<cid>
Description
Integer type
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The
parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in
other PDP context-related commands. The range of
permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the
test form of the command
1-10
Supported values. Ericsson specific
<PDP_type>
Description
IP
Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)
<APN>
Description
String type
(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical
name that is used to select the GGSN or the external
packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then
the subscription value will be requested
<PDP_address>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 117 of 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
String type
A string parameter that identifies the MS in the
address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is
null or omitted, then a value may be provided by
the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing
that, a dynamic address will be requested
<d_comp>
Description
0
PDP data compression OFF
PDP data compression ON
Reserved
1
2..255
<h_comp>
Description
0
PDP header compression OFF
PDP header compression ON
Reserved
1
2..255
<pdN>
Description
String type
Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific
to the <PDP_type>
6.5 AT+CGEREP
GPRS Event Reporting
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set command
+CGEREP=[<mode>
[,<bfr>]]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
+CGEREP?
•_+CGEREP:
<mode>,<bfr>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGEREP=?
supported
•_+CGEREP: (list of
supported
<mode>s),(list of
supported <bfr>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 118 of 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV: XXX from
MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS/packet domain
MS or the network.
<mode>
Description
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are
forwarded to the TE
1
Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is
reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE
<bfr>
Description
0
MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this
command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Show PDP addresses for +CGPADDR=[<cid>
specified CIDs [,<cid> [,…]]]
•_+CGPADDR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[<CR><LF>+CGPAD
DR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGPADDR=?
supported
•_+CGPADDR: (list of
defined <cid>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The test
command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
<cid>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 119 of 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer type
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are
returned
<PDP_address>
Description
String type
A string that identifies the MS in the address space
applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or
dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by
the +CGDCONT command when the context was
defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one
assigned during the last PDP context activation that
used the context definition referred to by <cid>.
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available
6.7 AT+CGQMIN
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum
Acceptable)
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set minimum +CGQMIN=[<cid>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
acceptable
profile
[,<precedence>
[,<delay> [,<reliability>
[,<peak>
•_ERROR
[,<mean>]]]]]]
Read the
command
+CGQMIN?
•_+CGQMIN: <cid>,
<precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN
: <cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>,
<peak>, <mean>[…]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
+CGQMIN=?
•_+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list
of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported
<reliability>s) , (list of
supported <peak>s), (list of
supported
<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQM
IN: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported
<reliability>s) , (list of
supported <peak>s), (list of
supported <mean>s)[…]]
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 120 of 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_OK
•_ERROR
Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by
the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context
Accept message.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local)
context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter
that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN command is
effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile
consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate
value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the minimum
acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In this
case no check is made against the negotiated profile.
<cid>
Description
Integer type
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition
<precedence>
Description
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used
High priority
Normal priority
Low priority
<delay>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Delay class
1-4
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 121 of 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<reliability>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Reliability class
1-5
<peak>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed (from network) value used
Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)
Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s)
Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s)
Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s)
Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)
Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)
Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)
<mean>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Best effort
1
2
100 (~0.22 bits/s)
3
200 (~0.44 bits/s)
4
500 (~1.11 bits/s)
5
1000 (~2.2 bits/s)
6
2 000 (~4.4 bits/s)
5 000 (~11.1 bits/s)
10 000 (~22 bits/s)
20 000 (~44 bits/s)
50 000 (~111 bits/s)
100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s)
200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s)
500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 122 of 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
15
16
17
18
31
1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s)
2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s)
5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s)
10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s)
20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s)
50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s)
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set quality of +CGQREQ=[<cid>
service profile[,<precedence>
[,<delay>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
[,<reliability>
•_ERROR
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
+CGQREQ?
Read the
command
•_+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:
<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
+CGQREQ=?
•_+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,
(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:
<PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported
<delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when the MS
sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local)
context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 123 of 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ command is
effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile
consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate
value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the requested
profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
<cid>
Description
Integer type
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition
<precedence>
Description
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used
High priority
Normal priority
Low priority
<delay>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Delay class
1-4
<reliability>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Reliability class
1-5
<peak>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Subscribed (from network) value used
Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)
Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s)
Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s)
Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s)
Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)
Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 124 of 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
8
9
Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)
<mean>
Description
0
Subscribed (from network) value used
Best effort
1
2
100 (~0.22 bits/s)
3
200 (~0.44 bits/s)
4
500 (~1.11 bits/s)
5
1 000 (~2.2 bits/s)
6
2 000 (~4.4 bits/s)
7
5 000 (~11.1 bits/s)
10 000 (~22 bits/s)
8
9
20 000 (~44 bits/s)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
31
50 000 (~111 bits/s)
100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s)
200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s)
500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s)
1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s)
2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s)
5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s)
10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s)
20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s)
50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s)
6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set command
AT+CGREG=[<n>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 125 of 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the current
settings
AT+CGREG?
•_+CGREG:
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,
<ci>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CGREG=?
supported
•_+CGREG: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network
registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when
<n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
ꢀ NOTE! - If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports
circuit mode services, the +CGREG command and
+CGREG: result code apply to the registration status
and location information for those services.
<n>
Description
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
Enable network registration unsolicited result code
Enable network registration and location information
unsolicited result code
Note!_
<stat>
Description
0
Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to
register with
1
2
Registered, home network
Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to
register with
3
4
5
Registration denied
Unknown
Registered, roaming
Note!_
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 126 of 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<lac>
Description
String type
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
Note!_
Note!_
<ci>
Description
String type
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
6.10 AT+CGSMS
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set service or service
preference
+CGSMS=[<service>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
+CGSMS?
•_+CGSMS: <service>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is +CGSMS=?
supported
•_+CGSMS: (list of
available <service>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to send
MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently selected service
or service preference.
<services>
Description
2
GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if
GPRS/packet domain not available)
3
Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if
circuit switched not available)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 127 of 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data - HSCSD
7.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Show current HSCSD AT+CHSC
call parameters
•_+CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<codi
ng>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if command is
supported
AT+CHSC=?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the
current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate and
channel coding.
<rx>
Description
0
1
2
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2
<tx>
Description
0
1
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below
The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1
<aiur>
Description
0
1
3
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below.
Current air interface user rate is 9.6 kbits/s
Current air interface user rate is 19.2 kbits/s
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 128 of 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<coding>
Description
0
4
8
No HSCSD call is active. See also note
Current channel coding is 9.6 kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)
Current channel coding is 14.4 kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)
7.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Show HSCSD features AT+CHSD
supported by the ME/TA
•_+CHSD:
<mclass>,<maxRx>,
<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings
>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if command is
supported
AT+CHSD=?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.
<mclass>
Description
2
Multislot class is 2
<maxRx>
Description
2
Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is
2
<maxTx>
Description
1
Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use
is 1
<sum>
Description
3
Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME
can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following
applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit
slots) <sum>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 129 of 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<codings>
Description
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbits/s
only
7.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set HSCSD
configuration. This
command is also used [,<codings>]]]]
during a call if new
AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>
[,<wRx>[,<topRx>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
<wAiur> and/or <wRx>
are/is desired
Show current non-
transparent HSCSD
setting
AT+CHSN?
•_+CHSN: <wAiur>,
<wRx>, <topRx>,
<codings>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter ranges
AT+CHSN=?
•_+CHSN: (list of
supported <wAiur>s),
(list of supported
<wRx>s), (list of
supported <topRx>s),
(list of supported
<codings>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing <topRx> or
<codings> during a call does not affect the current call. Changing <wAiur>
or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx> was non-zero when the call
was established. When using the command in this way it comes in the
“action” command category. This is what is referred to as user initiated up-
and down-grading in GSM 02.34 and GSM 03.34.
ꢀ NOTE! - Recommended value for parameter <speed> in
AT+CBST is 0.
<wAiur>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 130 of 130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive
timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate
(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, and
<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD
command if <wRx>=0)
1
2
3
4
Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6 kbit/s
Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4 kbit/s
Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2 kbit/s
Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8 kbit/s
Note!_
<wRx>
Description
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive
timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and
<codings> See note below
1
2
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2
Note!_
<topRx>
Description
0
Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>
and /or <wRx> during the next call
1
2
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2
Note!_
Note!_
<codings>
Description
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbit/s only
7.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 131 of 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set HSCSD parameters AT+CHSR=[<mode>]
reporting on or off
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show current setting
AT+CHSR?
•_+CHSR: <mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter range
AT+CHSR=?
•_+CHSR: (list of
supported
<modes>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
With this command enabled, the intermediate result code
+CHSR:
<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding> is returned (from TA to TE) when an HSCSD
call is being set up. The result code represents the current (negotiated or
renegotiated) HSCSD parameters. If enabled, the intermediate result code is
transmitted at the point of the call setup negotiation, where the ME/TA has
determined what type of HSCSD connection will be used. Result code
transmission is done after possible service (CR), error control (+ER), and/or
compression (+DR) reporting, but before possible TE-TA rate (+ILRR)
reporting and before the intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted.
The format of the intermediate result code is:
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>
For the value definitions, refer to AT+CHSC
Parameters
HSCSD Current Call
For instance, for a non-transparent HSCSD call, result code ‘CHSR: 2, 1, 4, 8’
means that the call has two timeslots downlink, one timeslot uplink, the air
interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s and the used channel coding is
TCH/F14.4.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Disable reporting
Enable reporting
Itermediate Result Codes:
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 132 of 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set HSCSD automatic
user initiated upgrading
on or off
AT+CHSU=[<mode>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show current setting
AT+CHSU?
•_+CHSU=<mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter range
AT+CHSU=?
•_+CHSU: (list of
supported
<modes>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.
<mode>
Description
0
1
Disable use of UP bit for upgrading. Default value
Enable use of UP bit for upgrading
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 133 of 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fax
8.1 AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate
Modification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request change of fax AT*E2FAX= <RcV>
comm. baud rate
•_ERROR
•_OK
Displays currently set
rate
AT*E2FAX?
•_*E2FAX: <RcV>
•_ERROR
Shows if the command AT*E2FAX=?
is supported
•_*E2FAX: (list of
supported <RcV>s)
•_ERROR
This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232 comm.
setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud. This is needed as the
addition of fax capabilities, within the module, require communication
between fax applications and the module to run at a higher baud rate than
the fax transmission baud rate (In this case the fastest transmission rate is
9600 baud). Once this command has been performed, the user must then
execute the AT&F command to reset the module with the new RS232 comm's
baud rate.
The AT*E2FAX command allows the user to:
ꢀ “Configure” the RS232 Comm. speed default factory profile,
specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud (standard) or
19200 baud for FAX application comm. This value will then be
used once the AT&F command is next used.
ꢀ “Read” what value this default factory profile has been set to.
<RcV>
Description
0
1
Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud
Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud
•_
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 134 of 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
AT*E2FAX=?
*E2FAX= (0-1)
OK
AT*E2FAX?
*E2FAX: 0
OK
(Current default setting is 19200 baud)
(Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud)
AT*E2FAX=0
OK
8.2 Low Level Fax Commands
The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used by the
TT4031 (SE-GM29) for fax operation.
AT+FAA
AT+FBADLIN
AT+FBUG
AT+FCQ
AT+FBADMUL
AT+FCIG
AT+FCR
AT+FBOR
AT+FCLASS
AT+FDCC
AT+FDR
AT+FDFFC
AT+FDT
AT+FDIS
AT+FECM
AT+FLID
AT+FET
AT+FK
AT+FLNFC
AT+FMFR?
AT+FMM?
AT+FPTS
AT+FREV?
AT+FRS
AT+FLPL
AT+FMI?
AT+FMR?
AT+FRBC
AT+FRH
AT+FMDL?
AT+FMINSP
AT+FPHCTO
AT+FREL
AT+FRM
AT+FSPL
AT+FTM
AT+FTBC
AT+FTS
AT+FTH
AT+FVRFC
AT+FWDFC
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 135 of 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification
9.1 AT
Attention Command
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Checks the communication
between the MS and application
AT
•_OK
•_+CME ERROR <err>
This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS
supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.
9.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Execute
AT&F
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if supported and AT&F=?
list available parameter
range
&F: (list of supported
<profile>s)
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values
specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration hardware
configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.
9.3 AT&W Store User Profile
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Stores the current user AT&W=[<pr>] or
•_OK
profile to non volatile
memory
AT&W[<pr>]
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT&W=?
supported
&W: (list of supported
<pr>s)
This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 136 of 136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
< pr>
Description
0
Stores current settings in User Profile 0
9.4 AT* List all Supported AT Commands
Description
Command
Possible Responses
List all implemented AT AT*
commands
<AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[…]]
/
<AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[…]]
Lists all the commands supported by the MS.
9.5 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request manufacturer AT+CGMI
identification
•_<manufacturer>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT+CGMI=?
supported
•_ERROR
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.
<manufacturer>
Description
Sony Ericsson
This company’s name is displayed
9.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 137 of 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Request the model
identification
AT+CGMM
•_<model type>
<model name>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT+CGMM=?
supported
•_ERROR
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,
determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of the
ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is connected.
Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the
product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more information if
desired.
<model type>
Description
String type
A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10
characters long. Spaces are used when the number of
characters/digits is less than 10
<model name>
Description
String type
Model name for the transceiver unit, for example,
TT4031 (SE-GM29)
9.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request MS revision
identification string
AT+CGMR
•_<revision>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT+CGMR=?
supported
•_ERROR
This command causes the MS to return a string containing information about
the software version.
<revision>
Description
String type
An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,
minute) plus KRC number.
Example: 9710051610 CXC125112
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 138 of 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.8 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request product serial AT+CGSN
number
•_<sn>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT+CGSN=?
supported
•_ERROR
This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile station
Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.
<sn>
Description
String
The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station
Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03) number of the ME and
the software version number. Text shall not contain the
sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
9.9 ATI
Identification Information
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Execute
ATI[<value>]
<information>
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text, followed
by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to select from
among multiple types of identifying information as shown in the table below.
This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.
<value>
Description
0
Same information as +GMM command (model
identification)
1
3
Same information as +GMR command (revision
identification)
Modem model description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 139 of 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
7
Active settings
Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem
functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,
etc.)
8
9
DCE hardware type version
PnP (plug and play) information
9.10 AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request complete
capability list
AT+GCAP
+GCAP: (list of
supported
<capability>s)
Test if command is
supported
AT+GCAP=?
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns a list of valid modem command prefixes.
<capability> Description
GSM
3G1 single mode 3G1 dual mode
+CGSM
GSM commands
Supported Supported
Supported
+FCLASS
Facsimile class 1
and 2 commands
Supported Not supported
Not supported
+DS
V.42 bis
compression
Supported Not supported
Supported (only
for Circuit
Switched data calls
in a GSM network)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 140 of 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interface
10.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
10.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set behavior of carrier AT&C[<value>]
detect
OK
ERROR
Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.
<value>
Description
0
1
DCD always on
DCD follows the connection. Default value
10.3 AT&DCircuit 108 (DTR) Response
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Control actions from
DTE
AT&D[<value>]
OK
ERROR
Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.
<value>
Description
0
1
Ignore. Default value
When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command
mode. For all other states, see <value>=2
2
Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 141 of 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4 AT&S Circuit 107 (DSR) Response
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set behaviour of data
set ready
AT&S[<value>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Determines the behaviour of the data set ready signal.
<value>
Description
0
1
DSR always on
DSR on in data mode. DSR off in command mode.
Default value
10.5 AT+WS46 Mode Selection
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Sets the cellular
protocol mode
AT+WS46=n
AT+WS46?
•_OK
•_ERROR
Queries the current
cellular protocol mode
•_<n> OK
•_ERROR
Queries the possible
cellular protocol modes
AT+WS46=?
•_(list of supported <n>s) OK
•_ERROR
Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of the
phone.
<n> parameter
Description
12
This value is used for GSM at 900 MHz., DCS-1900,
and PCS-1900 phones
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 142 of 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.6 ATE Command Echo
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request Command Echo ATE[<value>]
ATE=[<value>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
ATE?
<value>
Show if the command is ATE=?
supported
E: (list of supported
<value>s)
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes
characters received from the DTE during command state and online
command state.
<value>
Description
0
DCE does not echo characters during command state and
online command state
1
DCE echoes characters during command state and online
command state. Default value
10.7 ATV DCE Response Format
Description
Command
ATV[=]<value>
Possible Responses
Set DCE response
format
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting ATV?
V: <value>
Show if the command is ATV=?
supported
V: (list of supported
<value>s)
Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV command sets
the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the <S3><S4> additions
to the command response.
<value>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 143 of 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
Display numeric result codes
Display verbose result codes. Default value
List of result codes
ATV1/ATV=1
ATV0/ATV=0
Description
OK
0
Acknowledges execution of a command
CONNECT
1
A connection has been established; the
DCE is moving from command state to
online data state
RING
2
3
The DCE has detected an incoming call
signal from the network
NO CARRIER
The connection has been terminated or
the attempt to establish a connection
failed
ERROR
4
Command not recognized, command
line maximum length exceeded,
parameter value invalid, or other
problem with processing the command
line
NO DIALTONE
BUSY
6
7
8
No dial tone detected
Engaged (busy) signal detected
NO ANSWER
“@” (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial
modifier was used, but remote ringing
followed by five seconds of silence was
not detected before expiration of the
connection timer
CONNECT
<TEXT>
Manufacturer- Same as CONNECT, but includes
specific
manufacturer-specific text that may
specify DTE speed, line speed, error
control, data compression, or other
status
10.8 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Execute
ATZ
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Execute
ATZ=<profile>
Rev 1.0
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Page 144 of 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if supported and ATZ=?
list available parameter
range
Z: (list of supported
<profile>s)
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default values
as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration switches or non-
volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using this command.
Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will be
ignored.
<profile >
Description
0
Select the user profile to restore
10.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Switch to 07.10
AT+CMUX=<transpar +CME ERROR: <err>
ency>[,<subset>[,
<port_speed>[,<N1>
[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2
>
[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]
AT+CMUX?
Returns current
setting for
•_+CMUX:<transparency>,
<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1
>,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,
<k>]
multiplexer
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Show list of
supported services
AT+CMUX=?
•_+CMUX: (list of supported
<transparency>s),
(list of supported <subset>s),
(list of supported
<port_speed>s),
(list of supported <N1>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of supported <N2>s),
(list of supported <T2>s),
(list of supported <T3>s),
(list of supported <k>)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
SI C25-68003
The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “no transparency is
supported”. The parameter <k> is not used.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 145 of 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The default values for the parameters below are for “no transparency” and
“only UIH frames used”.
<transparency>
Description
0
No transparency
<subset>
Description
0
Only UIH frames used
<port_speed>
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9 600 bits/s
19 200 bits/s
38 400 bits/s
57 600 bits/s
115 200 bits/s
230 400 bits/s
460 800 bits/s
<N1>
Description
31
Default maximum frame size
<T1>
Description
10
100ms default timer
<N2>
Description
3
Default maximum number of re-transmissions
<T2>
Description
30
300ms default timer
<T3>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 146 of 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
10 s default timer
<k>
Description
1..7
Window size
10.10 AT+CRESRestore SMS Settings
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Restore settings
AT+CRES[=<profile>]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Get available profiles
AT+CRES=?
•_+CRES: (list of
supported <profile>s)
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings specified in
commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP
and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are
restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS parameters, cannot be restored.
<profile>
Description
0..2
Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default
value is 0
10.11 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE
character framing
AT+ICF=[format[,parity]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 147 of 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the current
setting
AT+ICF?
•_+ICF:
<format>,<parity>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command AT+ICF=?
is supported
•_+ICF: (list of
supported
<format>s), (list of
supported <parity>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the local
serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE to
accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text and result
code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not supported) +IPR=0
forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).
<format>
Description
3
8 Data 1 Stop. Default value
<parity>
Description
3
Space. Default value
10.12 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE local AT+IFC=[<by_te>,
flow control [<by_ta>]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT+IFC?
+IFC:
<by_te>,<by_ta>
Show if the command is AT+IFC=?
supported
+IFC: (list of supported
<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)
Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in on-
line data mode.
No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 148 of 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<by_te>
Description
0
1
No flow control on DTE
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are
removed by the DCE interface
2
3
RTS flow control on DCE. Default value
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are
passed to the remote DCE/DTE
<by_ta>
Description
0
1
2
No flow control on DCE
Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE
CTS flow control on DCE. Default value
10.13 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE
character framing
AT+ILRR=<value>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT+ILRR?
+ILRR:<value>
Show if the command is AT+ILRR=?
supported
+ILRR:(list of supported
<values>s)
Specifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>” information
text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate> reported shall
represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE rate. If enabled,
the intermediate result code is transmitted after any modulation, error
control or data compression reports are transmitted, and before any final
result code (e.g. CONNECT) is transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the
final result code is transmitted.
<value>
Description
0
Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not
transmitted). Default value
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 149 of 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is
transmitted)
10.14 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Defines fixed DTE rate AT+IPR=[rate]
Read the current setting AT+IPR?
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_+IPR:<rate>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+IPR=?
supported
•_+IPR: (), (list of
fixed-only <rate>s)]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in addition to
1200 bits/s or 9600 bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause 4.3). It may be
used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which the DCE is not
capable of automatically detecting.
The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result code(s)
associated with the current command line.
<rate>
Description
Discrete integer The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per
value
second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,
e.g. “19 200” or “115 200”. The rates supported by a
particular DCE are manufacturer specific.
The following rates, are supported;
1 200
2 400
4 800
9 600
19 200
38 400
57 600
115 200
230 400
460 800
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 150 of 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.15 AT*E2ESC
M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time
Description
Command
Possible responses
Set GPRS online
command guard time
AT*E2ESC=[<gt>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT*E2ESC?
*E2ESC: <gt>
Show if the command is AT*E2ESC=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-line
command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the data
stream or a terminating string from the application and no further data is
received for the duration of the guard time the modem will go into on line
command mode. This guards against the modem accidentally going into on
line command mode. The verbose format of +++AT<CR> is
<S2><S2><S2>AT<S3>.
<gt>
Description
0
No guard time. Default value
1-10
Guard time in seconds
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 151 of 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network
11.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request network cell
description
AT*E2CD=<n>
•_ERROR
•_OK
Read the command
AT*E2CD?
•_*E2CD:
<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta
>
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*E2CD=?
supported
•_*E2CD: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_ERROR
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when <n>=1,
or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters, E2CD:
<lac>,<ci>,<ta>.
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several
values, which show the network cell parameters.
Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when <n>=1
and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is registered use
the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in the cellular network an
ERROR message is returned.
<n>
Description
0
Disable network location information unsolicited result
code. Default value
1
Enable network location information unsolicited result
code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>
<lac>
Description
String type
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 152 of 152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
string type
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<ta>
Description
0-63
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing
advance value is the binary representation of the timing
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is
the integer representation of the timing advance in
binary format
64-255
Reserved
11.2 AT*E2EMM
Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring
Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set the
response
presentation mode
AT*E2EMM=
<n>[,<m>]
•_ERROR
•_OK
Display mode
neighbour cells are
taken from the
toplist
*E2EMM:
Serving Cell
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,
C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,T
A,TN],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>
[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub
>, <rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],
NeighBours Cells
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,
C2],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
Compact mode.
The first cell is the
serving cell, the
rest are neighbour
cells taken from
the toplist
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,
<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqs
ub>,
<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>, <rxl>,
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl
>,
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl
>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 153 of 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OK
Verbose mode.
The first cell is the
serving cell and
the rest are
neighbour cells as
provided by the
network in the
system info.
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub
>, <ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
messages (2 and
5) and via the
AT*E2NBTS
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
command
Reduced display
mode - info. as
display mode but
without text
headings or
<CR><LF>
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub
>, <ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
separators,
neighbour cells
from top list
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch
>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
Read the commandAT*E2EMM?
•_*E2EMM: <n>
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT*E2EMM=?
•_*E2EMM: (list of supported
<n>s),(list of supported <m>s)
•_ERROR
There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose, and
Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or continuous
unsolicited responses).
The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the data in
a readable form, including headers and line breaks (<CR><LF>). This format
is, however, not well suited for machine decoding. The formats Verbose,
Compact and Reduced Display do not have headers or line breaks. Verbose
mode displays more parameters than the compact mode.
The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or an
unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 154 of 154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
AT*E2EMM=1
*E2EMM:<CR><LF>
Serving Cell<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,
RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,TN]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,
<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>]<CR><LF>
NeighBours Cells<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
OK
AT*E2EMM=3
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,
<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,
<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,
<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,
<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,
<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,
<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl>
<CR><LF>
OK
AT*E2EMM=5
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,
<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],
<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]
<CR><LF>
OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 155 of 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT*E2EMM=7
*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,
<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],
<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,< neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]
OK
The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in the
table below.
When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n>=1, but
neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information that
comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS that are on
the Serving Cell's surroundings.
<n>
Description
0
Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.
Default value
1
2
One shot presentation of the network location
information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>
line separators
Enable network location information unsolicited result
code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous
unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart
3
4
One shot presentation of the compact network location
information
Enable compact network location information unsolicited
result code. There will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
5
One shot presentation of the network location
information (verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming
from the Serving Cell signalling information
6
7
As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
One shot presentation of the network information (same
information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line
separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 156 of 156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
<m>
Description
1-255
Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited
responses. Default value is 5
<mcc>
Description
Integer type
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<mnc>
Description
Integer type
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell
<lac>
Description
Integer type
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci>
Description
Integer type
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<bsic>
Description
Integer type
One byte Base Stations Identification code in
hexadecimal format
<ch>
Description
(0-1023)
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF
Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier
<rxl>
Description
Integer type
Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle
mode
<rxlfull>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 157 of 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer type
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is
taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100
TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe
<rxlsub>
Description
Integer type
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is
taken from the DownLink signal and the average is
applied to subset of SACCH frames
<rxqfull>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BER < 0.1 %
0.26 % < BER < 0.30 %
0.51 % < BER < 0.64 %
1.0 % < BER < 1.3 %
1.9 % < BER < 2.7 %
3.8 % < BER < 5.4 %
7.6 % < BER < 11.0 %
BER > 15.0 %
<mcc>
Description
Integer type
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received signal on
dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a subset of a
SACCH multiframe.
<rxqsub>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
BER < 0.1 %
0.26 % < BER < 0.30 %
0.51 % < BER < 0.64 %
1.0 % < BER < 1.3 %
1.9 % < BER < 2.7 %
3.8 % < BER < 5.4 %
7.6 % < BER < 11.0 %
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 158 of 158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
BER > 15.0 %
<c1>
Description
Integer
Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS
calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the
cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the
criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08
<c2>
Description
Integer
Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This
parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection
<ta>
Description
0-63
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing
advance value is the binary representation of the timing
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is
the integer representation of the timing advance in
binary format
64-255
Reserved
<tn>
Description
0-7
Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic
channel
11.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request service providerAT*E2SPN
indication
•_*E2SPN: <spi>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT*E2SPN=?
supported
•_ERROR
Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM card
(<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes
containing the service provider name stored in the EFSPN file in the SIM card
(see GSM 11.11). ERROR is returned if the field is not present on the SIM.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 159 of 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<spi>
Description
String
String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character
set as specified by command Select TE character set
+CSCS
11.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Requests current status AT*EALS
for ALS
•_*EALS: <status>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EALS=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status. The
information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user has two
lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is then
indicated on the display.
<status>
Description
0
1
ALS function is not active (off)
ALS function is active (on)
11.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read the customer
service profile from the group>
SIM
AT*ECSP=<service
•_*ECSP: <service
group>,<services>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 160 of 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the command is AT*ECSP=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from the
SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are user
accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP. The services
are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8 services in a group.
For each service group, a bit mask tells which services are available (bit=1).
Unused bits are set to 0.
<service
group>
Description
Byte
Each service group has a corresponding number, service
group code
<services>
Description
byte
Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the
service group
Bit=0: unused or unavailable service
Bit=1: available service
11.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read entries in SIM
preferred list
AT*EPNR=<format>
[,<index1>
[,<index2]]
•_*EPNR:
<index1>,<oper1>[...
]*EPNR: <index2>,
<oper2>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and list the
possible settings
AT*EPNR=?
•_*EPNR: (list of
supported <index>s),
(list of supported
<format>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 161 of 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks (EFPLMNSEL).
<index1>
Description
integer
Start index (>0)
<index2>
Description
integer
Stop index (>0)
<format>
Description
2
Numeric <oper>
<oper>
Description
string
String indicates the code for the operator.
E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
11.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Write/delete entries in AT*EPNW=[<index>]
SIM preferred list [,<format>,<oper>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EPNW=?
supported and list the
possible settings
•_*EPNW: (list of
supported <index>s),
(list of supported
<format>)s
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks (EFPLMNSEL).
The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code (MCC) and mobile
network code (MNC).
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 162 of 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<index>
Description
Integer
Index to entry in SIM preferred list.
The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions
according to GSM 11.11
<format>
Description
2
Numeric <oper>
<oper>
Description
String
String indicates the code for the operator.
E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
11.8 AT*E2SSNEricsson M2M SIM Serial Number
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request SIM Serial
number
AT*E2SSN?
*E2ESSN: <SSN>
Shows if the command AT*E2SSN=?
is supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field
(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE. This
field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.
<SSN>
Description
String without SIM serial number
double quotes
EXAMPLES
AT*E2SSN?
8944110063503224707
OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 163 of 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is
984411003605234207F7.
Test command:
AT*E2SSN=?
OK
11.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Sets the line name tag AT*ESLN=<line>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
in the MS
[,<name>]
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT*ESLN?
•_*ESLN:
<line1>,<name1><CR><LF
> *ESLN: <line2>,<name2>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*ESLN=?
supported and list the
possible settings
•_*ESLN: (list of supported
<line>s),<lname>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sets the name tag for a selected line.
<line>
Description
0
This means that the two lines will use the default name
tags, i.e. “L1” and “L2”. Default value
1
2
Line 1
Line 2
<name>
Description
String
Characters for name tag
This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0
<lname>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 164 of 164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer
Maximum number of characters to use in <name> string
(20)
11.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read IMSI
AT+CIMI
•_<IMSI>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CIMI=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM attached to
the ME.
<IMSI>
Description
string without International Mobile Subscriber Identity
double quotes
11.11 AT+CLCKFacility Lock
Description
Request facility lock
Command
Possible Responses
AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
•_when <mode>=2 and
command successful:
+CLCK:
<status>[,<class1>
[<CR><LF>+CLCK:
<status>,<class2>[...]]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command AT+CLCK=?
is supported
•_+CLCK: (list of
supported <fac>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 165 of 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network
facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.
Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer to GSM
02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on other GSM
supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.
<fac>
Description
“CS”
“PS”
CNTRL (lock CoNTRoL surface (e.g. phone keyboard))
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password
when other than current SIM card inserted)
“SC”
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up
and when this lock command issued)
“FD”
“P2”
“AO”
“OI”
“AI”
“IR”
SIM fixed dialling feature. PIN2 is required as a password
SIM PIN2
BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)
BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)
BAIC (bar all incoming calls)
BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the
home country)
“OX”
BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to
home country)
“AB”
“AG”
“AC”
“PN”
“PU”
“PP”
“PC”
All barring services
All out going barring services
All in coming barring services
Network personalization
Network subset personalization
Service provider personalization
Corporate personalization
<mode>
Description
0
Unlock
1
Lock
2
Query status
10
Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on
always ask for password)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 166 of 166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<status>
Description
0
1
Not active
Active
<passw>
Description
string type
Is the same as password specified for the facility from
the ME user interface or with change password
command, +CPWD
<classx>
Description
1
Voice L1
2
Data
4
Fax
8
Short message service
Data circuit sync
Data circuit async
Dedicated packet access
Voice L2
16
32
64
128
1..30
When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the time
in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default
value is 20
11.12 AT+CNUM
Subscriber Number
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request subscriber AT+CNUM
number
•_+CNUM:
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>
[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<C
R><LF>+CNUM:
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>
[,<speed>,<service>
[,<itc>]][…]]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 167 of 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNUM=?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this
information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has different
MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.
<alphax>
Description
Alphanumeric Associated with <numberx>; used character set should
string
be the one selected with the Select TE character set
command, +CSCS
<numberx>
Description
String type
Phone number of format specified by <typex>
<typex>
Description
Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)
<speed>
Description
data rate
As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07
<service>
Description
0
4
5
Asynchronous modem
Voice
Fax
<itc>
Description
0
1
3.1 kHz
UDI
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 168 of 168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.13 AT+COLPConnected Line Identification Presentation
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request connected line AT+COLP=[<n>]
identification
presentation
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+COLP?
•_+COLP: <n>,<m>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+COLP=?
supported
•_+COLP: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP
(Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling subscriber
to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a
mobile originated call. The command enables or disables the presentation of
the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary
service COLR in the network.
When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), +COLP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate result
code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter responses.
It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when normal voice call is
established.
Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of
the provision status of the COLP service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in
<m>).
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<n>
Description
0
1
Disable
Enable
<m>
Description
0
1
2
COLP not provisioned
COLP provisioned
unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 169 of 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intermediate Result codes:
+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]
11.14 AT+COPSOperator Selection
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request operator
selection
AT+COPS=[<mode>
[,<format>
[,<oper>]]]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+COPS?
•_+COPS:
<mode>[,<format>,
<oper>]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+COPS=?
supported
•_+COPS: list of supported
(<stat>,long
alphanumeric <oper>,
short alphanumeric
<oper>,numeric
<oper>)s
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.
<mode>
Description
0
1
3
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)
Manual (<oper> field present)
Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not
attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is
ignored); this value is not applicable in read command
response
4
Manual/automatic (<oper> field present); if manual
selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered
<format>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 170 of 170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
2
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)
Short format alphanumeric <oper>
Numeric <oper>
<oper>
Description
string type
Format determined by the <format> setting
<stat>
Description
0
1
2
3
Unknown
Available
Current
Forbidden
11.15 AT+CREGNetwork Registration
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request network
registration
AT+CREG=[<n>]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command
AT+CREG?
•_+CREG: <n>,<stat>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CREG=?
supported
•_+CREG: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CREG:
<stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration
status.
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer
<stat>, which shows whether the network has currently indicated the
registration of the ME.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 171 of 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.
<n>
Description
0
Disable network registration unsolicited result code.
Default value
1
Enable network registration unsolicited result code
<stat>
Description
0
Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new
operator to register with
1
2
Registered, home network
Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new
operator to register with
3
4
5
Registration denied
Unknown
Registered, roaming
11.16 AT*ECPI Ciphering Indicator
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request activation of
the ciphering indication
AT*ECPI=<switch>
•_OK
•_+CME: <error>
•_ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT*ECPI?
•_*ECPI: <switch>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*ECPI=?
supported
•_*ECPI: (list of supported
<switch>es values)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command allows the external application to activate/deactivate the
ciphering indication. The ciphering indication allows the external application
to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered and thus
unsecured.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 172 of 172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test command gives the current value of the <switch> parameter, informing
if the indicator is enabled or disabled.
The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network
operator setting data in the “administrative data” field (EFAD) in the SIM as
defined in GSM 11.11.
If this feature is not disabled by the SIM, then whenever a connection is in
place, which is or becomes deciphered, an indication is given via the
unsolicited result code *ECPV:<ciphering>.
<switch>
Description
1
Ciphering indication is on. The unsolicited result code
*ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured
and when it becomes secure again
0
Ciphering indication is off. Disable the ciphering
indication, *ECPV is not sent
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*ECPV: <ciphering>. Sent only when <switch> is set to 0.
Unsolicited Result Codes
*ECPV - Ciphering Indicator
SYNTAX - Unsolicited Result code
Description
Response
When
Set command informs *ECPV: <ciphering> When AT*ECPI enables it,
the TE when a
the *ECPV:<ciphering> is
sent during a connection
whenever the
communication is not
enciphered. If a connection
becomes secure after that,
the *ECPV:<ciphering> is
sent again to indicate that
now the communication is
enciphered
communication is
unsecured due to the
fact that the network is
not enciphering the
communication
<ciphering>
Description
0
The connection is secured. The network enciphers the
communication
1
The connection is unsecured. The network does not
encipher the communication
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 173 of 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Neighbour
AT*E2NBTS=<ch1>,<bsic1>[,<c
•_ERROR
Cells to monitor h2>,<bsic2>[,<ch3>,<bsic3>[,
<ch4>,<bsic4>[,<ch5>,<bsic5>
[,<ch6>,<bsic6>[,<ch7>,<bsic7
>[,<ch8>,<bsic8>[,<ch9>,<bsi
c9>[,<ch10>,<bsic10>[,<ch11
>,<bsic11>[,<ch12>,<bsic12>[
,<ch13>,<bsic13>[,<ch14>,<bs
ic14>[,<ch15>,<bsic15>[,<ch1
6>,<bsic16>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]
•_OK
Read the
monitored
neighbour cells
AT*E2NBTS?
•_*E2NBTS:
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT*E2NBTS=?
•_*E2NBTS: (list of
supported <ch>s)
•_ERROR
The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs (<ch>) and the BSIC (the
BSIC is a cell colour code) to the MS in order to monitor those channels,
belonging to the neighbour cells, instead of the ones that come through the
air interface, in the serving cell information broadcast channel.
It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells. If less
than 16 <ch>s are provided, then the assigned channels shall substitute the
last previous channel (given either by the BCCH or by another AT*E2NBTS
command), if it is not in the list yet. Therefore, <ch1>,<bsic1> will
substitute BTS 16 in the MS, <ch2>,<bsic2> to the BTS 15 and so on. If any
of the <ch>s is already in the top-list, then it is skipped.
The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell, including the
following parameters: MCC, MNC, Cell ID, BSIC, Channel and Rx Level.
<ch>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 174 of 174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(0-1023)
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF
Channel, which identifies a BCCH carrier
<mcc>
Description
String Type
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<mnc>
Description
String Type
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell
<ci>
Description
String type
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<bsic>
Description
String Type
One byte Base Stations Identification code in
hexadecimal format
<rxl>
Description
String Type
Received Signal Strength level in dBm, measured in idle
mode
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 175 of 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phonebook
12.1 AT*E2PBCS
Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request phone book
checksum
AT*E2PBCS
•_*E2PBCS: <cks>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT*E2PBCS=?
supported
•_ERROR
Command causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks> stored
internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there is a change
in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external application can
detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without downloading the
whole phone book.
During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download the
phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number of
entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has been
calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.
<cks>
Description
Hex type
1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing the
checksum
12.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Adds a new item to the AT*ESAG=<gindex>,
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
group with <gindex>
<type>,
<itemindex>
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*ESAG=?
supported and list the
possible settings
•_*ESAG: (list of
supported <gindex>s,
list of supported
<type>s
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 176 of 176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.
<gindex>
Description
1-10
The group index within the hierarchical phone book
<type>
Description
1
Contact
2
Phone number
Description
<itemindex>
Integer
The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.
The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning:
if the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the
index of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to
add is a phone number the <itemindex> is the index in
the phone book
12.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Adds a new group to theAT*ESCG=<name>
hierarchical phone book
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows if the command AT*ESCG=?
is supported
•_*ESCG:
<maxnamelength>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The group
is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group positions in the
hierarchical phone book.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 177 of 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<name>
Description
String
The group name. Character set as specified by
command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)
<maxnamelength>
Description
integer
The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)
12.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set up a credit
card number
AT*ESCN=<mode>
[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]
[,<asn>,<type>,<name>
,<vercode>[,<send
order>]]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
when mode=3:*ESCN:
<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,
<name>,<vercode>,
<send order>
When mode=4:*ESCN:
<selindexn>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*ESCN=?
•_*ESCN: (list of supported
<index>s),(list of
supported <mode>s),(list
of supported <send
order>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Command is used to:
ꢀ set up a credit card number in the ME.
ꢀ disable credit card calls.
ꢀ enable one of the credit card call services.
ꢀ query the settings for one of the services.
ꢀ query the active credit call access server.
<mode>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 178 of 178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,
<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]).
The four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,
<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode>=0. If all those
are not submitted ERROR will be returned
1
2
Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other
parameters are submitted, they are ignored
Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,
<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they
are ignored
3
4
Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters
are submitted, they are ignored
Query for the selected credit call access server. If any
parameters are submitted, they are ignored
•_
•_
<passwd>
Description
String
character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM
<indexn>
Description
1
2
Index number to the first credit card call access server
Index number to the second credit card call access server
•_
•_
<selindexn>
Description
0
1
2
Credit card calling disabled
Index number to the first credit card call access server
Index number to the second credit card call access server
<asn>
Description
String
Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone
number of format specified by <typex>
•_
•_
<type>
Description
Integer format Type of address
<name>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 179 of 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
String
Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of
18 characters
•_
•_
<vercode>
Description
String
Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters
<send order> Description
1
2
Verification code first. Default value
phone number to call first
•_
12.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Deletes a group defined AT*ESDG=<gindex>
in the hierarchical phone
book
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Show if the command is AT*ESDG=?
supported and list the
possible <gindex>
•_*ESDG: list of
<gindex>s
•_OK
This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the hierarchical
phone book.
<gindex>
Description
1-10
The group index
12.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Deletes the item in
group <gindex> with
position <index>
AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<in
dex>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 180 of 180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*ESDI=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with <gindex>.
<gindex>
Description
1-10
The groups index within the hierarchical phone book
<index>
Description
1-15
The items index within the group
12.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Lists the groups defined AT*ESGR
in the hierarchical phone
book
•_*ESGR: <gindex1>,
<name1>[<CR><LF
> <gindex2>,
<name2>..]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows if the command AT*ESGR=?
is supported
OK
This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.
<gindex>
Description
1-10
The group index
<name>
Description
String
The group name
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 181 of 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.8 AT*EGIR Ericsson Group Item Read
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Lists the items in the
<gindex> group
AT*EGIR=<gindex>
•_*EGIR: <index1>,
<type1>,<itemindex>
[<CF><LF><index2>,
<type2>, <itemindex>
[...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the command is AT*EGIR=?
supported
•_ERROR
This command lists the items stored in the group identified by <gindex>.
<gindex>
Description
1-10
The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook
<index>
Description
1-15
The items index within the group
<type>
Description
Integer
The kind of item. See AT*ESAG <item> table for
definition
<itemindex>
Description
Integer
The item's index within the phonebook/contacts/group
12.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Sets a number in the
MS
AT*ESNU=<type>,
<number>[,<number
type>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 182 of 182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*ESNU=?
supported and show
possible settings
•_*ESNU: (list of
supported <type>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT*ESNU?
•_*ESNU: <type 1>,
<number 1>,
<number type 1>
<CR><LF> ….*ESNU:
<type n>,
<number n>,
<number type n>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in the
MS.
<type>
Description
0
1
2
3
Voice L1
Voice L2
Fax
Data
<number type> Description
129
145
Default value when dialling string does not include the
international access code character ‘+’
Default value when dialling string includes the
international access code character ‘+’
<number>
Description
0-9, +
Number
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 183 of 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Shows the current +CPBF=<findtext>
setting
•_+CPBF:
<index1>,<number>,<type
>,<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+C
BPF:
<index2>,<number>,<type
>,<text>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
+CPBF=?
•_+CPBF:
<nlength>,<tlength>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with <findtext>.
Only currently selected source will be searched for,
<findtext>
Description
string type
Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as
specified by the select TE character set command,
+CSCS
12.11 AT+CPBRPhonebook Read
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read phone
book entries
+CPBR=<index1>
[,<index2>]
•_+CPBR:<index1>,<number>,
<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,
<text>[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 184 of 184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the
command is
supported
+CPBR=?
•_+CPBR: (list of supported
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>... <index2>
from the current phone book memory storage selected with +CPBS. If
<index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned. Entry fields
returned are location number <indexn>, phone number stored there
<number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number.
<indexn>
Description
integer type
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book
memory
<number>
Description
string type
Phone number of format <type>
<type>
Description
129
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
161
128 - 255
<text>
Description
string type
Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set
command, +CSCS.
<nlength>
Description
integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<tlength>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 185 of 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
12.12 AT+CPBSPhone Storage
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set phone book storage AT+CPBS=<storage>
[,<password>]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT+CPBS?
•_+CPBS: <storage>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CPBS=?
supported
•_+CPBS: (list of
supported
<storage>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other
phone book commands. Read command returns currently selected memory,
and when supported by manufacturer, number of used locations and total
number of locations in the memory.
<storage>
Description
“FD”
“EN”
“ME”
“SM”
“DC”
“RC”
“MC”
Fixed dialled numbers
Emergency numbers
ME phone book
SIM phone book
ME dialled calls list (30 entries)
ME received calls list (30 entries)
ME missed calls list (30 entries)
<passwd>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 186 of 186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
String type
Represents the password required when selecting
password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for
storage “ME”
12.13 AT+CPBW
Phonebook Write
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request phone book
write
AT+CPBW=[<index>]
[, <number>[,<type>
[,<text>]]]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CPBW=?
supported
•_+CPBW: (list of
supported
<index>s),<nlength>
,(list of supported
<type>s),<tlength>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current phone
book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the <number> and
<text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If <index> is omitted
but <number> is included, the entry is written to the first free location in the
phone book.
<index>
Description
integer type
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book
memory
<number>
Description
string type
Phone number of format <type>
<type>
Description
integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string
includes international access code character "+",
otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)
129
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 187 of 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
161
128-255
<text>
Description
string type
Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set
command, +CSCS
<nlength>
Description
integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<tlength>
Description
integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 188 of 188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Short Message Services - Point to Point
13.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
13.2 AT+CGSMS
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
See 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages
13.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage
Common for both PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and Text Modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set preferred
message storage
AT+CPMS=<mem1>
[,<mem2>]
[,<mem3>]
•_+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2
>,<total2>,<used3>,<total
3>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the command AT+CPMS?
•_+CPMS:
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1
,
<mem2>,<used2>,<total2
,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3
>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the commandAT+CPMS=?
is supported
•_+CPMS: (list of supported
<mem1>s),(list of
supported <mem2>s),(list
of supported <mem3>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 189 of 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for
reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME (but is
supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.
<mem1>
Description
string type
Memory from which messages are read and deleted
(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message +CMGR
and Delete Message +CMGD)
“ME”
“SM”
ME message storage
SIM message storage. Default value
<mem2>
Description
string type
Memory to which writing and sending operations are
made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS
and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)
“ME”
“SM”
ME message storage
SIM message storage
<mem3>
Description
string type
Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored
(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are
always stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
storage) unless directly forwarded to TE
“ME”
“SM”
ME message storage
SIM message storage
<used1>,<used2>,<used3 Description
>
integer type
Total number of messages currently in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3>
respectively
<total1>,<total2>
,<total3>
Description
integer type
Total number of message locations in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3>
respectively
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 190 of 190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set service centre
address
AT+CSCA=<sca>
[,<tosca>]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CSCA?
•_+CSCA:
<sca>,<tosca>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the command is AT+CSCA=?
supported
•_ERROR
Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are
transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and write
(+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the same
commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu>
parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number in <sca> has
precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number starting with “+”
will always be treated as an international number.
<sca>
Description
string type
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value
field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default
alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set
<tosca>
Description
integer type
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-
address octet in integer format
129
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
161
128-255
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 191 of 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.5 AT+CMGF Message Format
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set message format
AT+CMGF=<mode>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_+CMGF: <mode>
•_OK
Read the current setting AT+CMGF?
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMGF=?
supported
•_+CMGF: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for
messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages used
with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result codes
resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP
data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages given as
separate parameters).
Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.
<mode>
Description
0
1
PDU mode
Text mode
13.6 AT+CMGWWrite Message to Memory
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Write message to
memory
AT+CMGW=<length>
[,<stat>]<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-
Z/ESC>
•_+CMGW: <index>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 192 of 192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the command isAT+CMGW=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status
will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status
values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different
default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the
same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing
fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See AT+CPMS
Preferred Message Storage
<stat>
Description
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
Description
...
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal
format
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 193 of 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Write message to
memory
AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>
[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]
] <CR>
•_+CMGW: <index>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
Text is entered <ctrl- •_OK
Z/ESC>
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the command isAT+CMGW=?
supported
•_ERROR
Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory storage
<mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. By
default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat>
allows also other status values to be given. The entering of text is done as
specified in the send message command, +CMGS. If writing fails, final result
code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
ꢀ NOTE! - SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs
cannot be stored in text mode.
<stat>
Description
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
Note!_
Note!_
<oa>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
Note!_
Note!_
<tooa>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 194 of 194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
Note!_
Note!_
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
13.7 AT+CMGS Send Message
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send message
AT+CMGS=<length>
<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-
Z/ESC>
•_+CMGS:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMGS=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.
Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network
support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon
unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or
an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This
command is abortable.
ꢀ <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP
layer data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are
excluded).
ꢀ The TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be
given from TE to ME/TA.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 195 of 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.
ꢀ The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by
V.25ter echo command E.
ꢀ The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for
<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the
actual octets of PDU.
ꢀ When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)
equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre
Address +CSCA is used.
ꢀ Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).
ꢀ <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU
<mr>
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
•_
•_
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<ackpdu>
Description
...
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU;
format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without
GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be
bounded by double quote characters like a normal string
type parameter
•_.
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send message
AT+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>] <CR>
Text is entered<ctrl-
Z/ESC>
•_+CMGS:
<mr>[,<scts>]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMGS=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 196 of 196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.
Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network
support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon
unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or
an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This
command is abortable.
ꢀThe entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>
and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP
and Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the
actual PDU in the ME/TA.
ꢀThe TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be
entered from the TE to the ME/TA.
ꢀThe DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.
ꢀThe echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by
V.25ter echo command E.
ꢀThe entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is
used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-
Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TE
Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered
text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A; backspace
can be used to delete last character and carriage returns can be
used (previously mentioned four character sequence shall be sent
to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user);
if TE character set is “HEX”: the entered text should consist of two
IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to
7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be
converted to character
(GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set:
the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal
numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A
(IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an octet with integer value 42).
ꢀSending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 197 of 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the
message body
ꢀ
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
•_
•_
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
•_.
<mr>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference
•_
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CSDH=1
OK
AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0
OK
AT+CMGS=“+447747008670”
> Test SMS
+CMGS: 15
OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 198 of 198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage
PDU mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send from storage
AT+CMSS=<index>
•_+CMSS: <mr>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMSS=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference
value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. If
sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS
ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. See AT+CPMS
Preferred Message Storage
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<mr>
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send from storage
AT+CMSS=<index>
[,<da> [,<toda>]]
•_+CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the commandAT+CMSS=?
is supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 199 of 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage <mem2>
to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> is
returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS
<service> value is 1 and network supports, <scts> is returned. If sending
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is
returned. This command is abortable.
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<scts>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<mr>
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
13.9 AT+CMGC
Send Command
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 200 of 200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Send command
message
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>
•_if PDU mode
(+CMGF=0) and
sending successful:
+CMGC:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
•_if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGC=?
•_ERROR
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The
entering of PDU is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS.
Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network
supports) <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message
upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a
network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
This command is abortable.
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
Description
String
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal
format
<mr>
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<ackpdu>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 201 of 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
String
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU;
format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without
GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be
bounded by double quote characters like a normal string
type parameter
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send command
message
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid
>[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]
<CR>
•_if PDU mode
(+CMGF=1) and
sending successful:
+CMGC:
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>
<mr>[,<scts>]
•_if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Show if the
commands is
supported
AT+CMGC=?
•_ERROR
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The
entering of text is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS, but
the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA character long hexadecimal
numbers, which the ME/TA converts into 8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS).
Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network
support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon
unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or
an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This
command is abortable.
<fo>
Description
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
<ct>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 202 of 202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Default value is 0
<pid>
Description
0-255
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<mn>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr>
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<scts>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer to <dt>)
13.10 AT+CNMINew Message Indications to TE
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set new message AT+CNMI=[<mode>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
indication to TE
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds
>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 203 of 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
]]]]
•_ERROR
Shows the current AT+CNMI?
setting
•_+CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNMI=?
•_+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the
network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If
the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as
specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network,
the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<mode>
Description
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result codes
and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<mt>
Description
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in
the SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send
an error message accordingly to GSM 03.38
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of
the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
1
2
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not
stored in ME/TA:
+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU
mode enabled)
Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined
in <mt>=1
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 204 of 204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using
unsolicited result codes +CMT:
<length><CR><LF><pdu>. Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is
not stored in ME/TA. Messages of other data coding
schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1
<bm>
Description
0
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).
New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory
<ds>
Description
0
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-
STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
1
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using
unsolicited result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF><
pdu> (PDU mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not
stored in ME/TA
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using
unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set new message AT+CNMI=[<mode>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
indication to TE
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds
>
]]]]
•_ERROR
Shows the current AT+CNMI?
setting
•_+CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 205 of 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNMI=?
•_+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the
network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If TE
is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as specified
in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network,
the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<mode>
Description
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result codes
and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<mt>
Description
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in
the SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send
an error message accordingly to GSM 03.38
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of
the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
1
2
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode
enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show
text mode command, +CSDH
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using
unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<
CR><LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About
parameters in italics, refer to the show text mode
command, +CSDH. Messages of other data coding
schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1
3
<bm>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 206 of 206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
2
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
+CBM:
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data
> (Text mode enabled)
<ds>
Description
0
1
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using
unsolicited result code: : +CDS:
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in
ME/TA
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using
unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
2
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
(Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH for
information on the parameters in italics.
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
Example
Display cell broadcast messages:
AT+CNMI=3,0,2,0,0
13.11 AT+CMGR
Read Message
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read message AT+CMGR=
<index>
•_+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]
<CR><LF><pdu>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 207 of 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGR=?
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message
storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message data
unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status
in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails, final result code
+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<stat>
Description
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (i.e. new message)
Received read message
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<alpha>
Description
String type
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
Description
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal
format
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 208 of 208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Read message AT+CMGR=
[<index>]
•_if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<too
a>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>
, <length>]<CR><LF><data>
•_if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>
,
<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
•_if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-STATUS-
REPORT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],
<scts>,<dt>,<st>
•_if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-COMMAND:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<
da>],[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><c
data>]
•_if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and CBM storage:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,
<pages><CR><LF><data>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGR=?
•_OK
•_ERROR
Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer command
Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the message is
‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If listing
fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 209 of 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
<stat>
Description
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (new message)
Received read message
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
<oa>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 210 of 210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<alpha>
Description
String type
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should
be. Used character set should be the one selected with
command Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<scts>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<data>
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character
Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM
alphabet according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete
last character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned
four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return
entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to
character
(GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered
text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which
ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be
converted to an octet with integer value 42);
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body
<fo>
Description
0
1
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 211 of 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
Description
3
<mr>
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference
<ra>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or
GSM default alphabet) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set (refef command
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
<dt>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format
"yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate
year, month, day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone
<st>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-status
<ct>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP--command-type. Default value is 0
<sn>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.41 CBM serial number
<mid>
Description
String type
All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. “0,1,5-7”
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer
format
<page>
Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer
format
<pages>
Integer type
<pid>
Description
GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer
format
Description
0 - 255
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<dcs>
Description
0 - 255
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and
compressed text not supported
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 212 of 212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<sca>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character set
<tosca>
Description
Integer type
GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in
integer format
129
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
Description
161
128 - 255
<vp>
0 - 143
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12
hous)
144 - 167
168 - 196
197 - 255
<mn>
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week
Description
Integer type
GSM 03.40 TP-message-number
13.12 AT+CMGL
List Message
PDU Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
List message AT+CMGL
[=<stat>]
•_+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<lengt
h>
<CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<lengt
h>
<CR><LF><pdu>[…]]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGL=?
•_+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 213 of 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note!_
Returns messages with status value <stat> from
preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE.
Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If status of
the message is ‘received unread’, status in the
storage changes to ‘received read’. If listing fails,
final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<stat>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
Received unread message (i.e. new message)
Received read message
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
Note!_
Note!_
Note!_
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<alpha>
Description
String type
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
Note!_
<pdu>
Description
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 214 of 214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
format
Note!_
Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
List message AT+CMGL
=[<stat>]
•_If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-SUBMITs and
SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL:
<index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<CR><LF><data>[…]]
•_If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-STATUS-
REPORT:
+CMGL:
<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>, [<ra>],
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]
•_If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct> [<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]
•_If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and CBM storage:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,
<pages>,<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF
>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,
<pages><CR><LF> <data>[…]]
•_Otherwise:
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 215 of 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Read the
current setting
•_+CMGL:<stat>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGL=?
•_+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage <mem1>
to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer command Show Text
Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the message is ‘received
unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If listing fails final
result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 216 of 216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<stat>
Description
Integer
Indicates the status of messages in memory
Received unread message (new message)
Received read message
0
1
2
3
4
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
<oa>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of
address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address
octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is
+(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora>
Description
String type
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<alpha>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 217 of 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
String type
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted i.e.
commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used
character set should be the one selected with command
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<scts>
Description
String type
GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<data>
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character
Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM
alphabet according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete
last character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned
four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return
entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to
character
(GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered
text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which
ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be
converted to an octet with integer value 42);
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body
<fo>
Description
0
1
2
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 218 of 218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
<mr>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference
<ra>
Description
String
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or
GSM default alphabet) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set (refef command
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
<dt>
Description
String
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz where characters indicate
year, month, day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone
<st>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Status
<ct>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)
<sn>
Description
Integer
GSM 03.41 CBM Serial Number
<mid>
Description
String type
All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. "0,1,5-7"
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer
format
<page>
Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4-7 in integer
format
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 219 of 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<pages>
Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0-3 in integer
format
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: “REC UNREAD”,“REC READ”,“STO UNSENT”,“STO SENT”,“ALL”
OK
13.13 AT+CMGD
Delete Message
Common for both PDU and Text modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Delete message
AT+CMGD=<index>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CMGD=?
supported
•_OK
•_ERROR
Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location
<index>. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Test command shows the valid memory locations.
<index>
Description
Integer type
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 220 of 220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.14 AT+CSDH
Show Text Mode Parameters
Only Applicable to Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set the show text mode AT+CSDH=[<show>]
Display current settings AT+CSDH?
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_+CSDH: <show>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is AT+CSDH=?
supported
•_+CSDH: (list of
supported <show>s)
•_OK
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode result
codes
<show>
Description
0
Do not show header values defined in commands
AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,
<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs
and SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in
+CMGR result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>,
<toda>, <length> or <cdata>
1
Show the values in result codes
.
13.15 AT+CSMPSet Text Mode Parameters
Only Applicable to Text Mode
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set the text mode AT+CSMP=[<fo>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
parameters
[,<vp>[,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]]
•_ERROR
Display current
settings
AT+CSMP?
•_+CSMP:
<fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 221 of 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CSMP=?
•_+CSMP: (List of supported
<fo>s), (list of supported
<vp>s), (list of supported
<pid>s), (list of supported
<dcs>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to
the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is
selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is
received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid> parameter
identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates interworking with a
certain type of telematic service and <dcs> determines the way the
information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.
<fo>
Description
0-255
Depending on the command or result code: first octet of
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value
17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default
value 2) in integer format
<vp>
Description
0-143
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12
hous)
144-167
168-196
197-255
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week
<pid>
Description
0-255
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<dcs>
Description
0-255
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and
compressed text not supported
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 222 of 222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.16 AT+CSCSSelect Character Set
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set command informs AT+CSCS=<chset>
TA which character set
is used by the TE
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CSCS?
•_+CSCS: <chset>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show list of supported AT+CSCS=?
character sets
•_+CSCS: (list of
supported <chset>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE.
The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME
character sets.
When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet is 7-
bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.
Note!_
How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or
from, the TE alphabet is manufacturer specific.
Read command shows current setting and test command display conversion
schemes implemented in the TA.
<chset>
Description
“GSM”
GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).
Default value
“IRA”
International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note:
recommended default value by GSM 07.07.
“8859-n”
“UTF8”
ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set
Universal text format, 8 bits
“ERICSSON”
Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character
set (ISO/IEC10646)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 223 of 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.17 AT+CSMS
Select Message Service
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Select message
service
AT+CSMS=<service>
•_+CSMS:
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show supported
message types along
with the current
service setting
AT+CSMS?
•_+CSMS:
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,
<bm>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show list of supported AT+CSMS=?
services
•_+CSMS: (list of
supported <service>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages
supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for
mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If the
chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the TA), final
result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<service>
Description
0
GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands
is compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0;
Phase 2+ features which do not require new command
syntax may be supported (e.g. correct routing of
messages with new Phase 2+ data coding schemes)
Reserved
2..127
<mt>
Description
0
1
Mobile terminated messages not supported
Mobile terminated messages supported
<mo>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 224 of 224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
Mobile originated messages not supported
Mobile originated messages supported
<bm>
Description
0
1
Broadcast messages not supported
Broadcast messages supported
<err>
Description
0...127
128...255
300
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values
ME failure
302
Operation not allowed
Invalid PDU mode parameter
SIM not inserted
304
310
311
SIM PIN required
312
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM failure
313
314
SIM busy
315
SIM wrong
316
SIM PUK required
317
SIM PIN2 required
318
SIM PUK2 required
Unknown error
500
...511
512...
Other values in range 256...511 are reserved
Manufacturer specific
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 225 of 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast
14.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
See 13.10, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
14.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type
Common for both PDU and text modes
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Select cell broadcast
message type
AT+CSCB=[<mode>
[,<mids>]]
•_+CMS ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+CSCB?
•_+CSCB:
<mode>,<mids>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CSCB=?
supported
•_+CSCB: (list of
supported <mode>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.
<mode>
Description
0
Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted
<mids>
Description
string type
All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. “0,1,5-7”
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer
format
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 226 of 226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIM Application Toolkit
15.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
15.2 AT*E2STKS
SIM Application Toolkit Settings
Description
Command
Possible responses
Set the presentation of the AT*E2STKS=<on_off
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
unsolicited result codes
corresponding to STK
>
•_ERROR
Read the current status of AT*E2STKS?
the presentation of the
unsolicited result codes
•_*E2STKS: <on_off>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*E2STKS=?
•_*E2STKD: list of
supported <on_off>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of the
unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands. Parameter
<on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result
code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so that it is not necessary to
change it each time the ME is switched on.
If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the messages
below are not sent to the application.
The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.
<on_off>
Description
0
Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes
related to STK. Default value
1
Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes
related to STK
Unsolicited Result Codes:
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 227 of 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received.
15.3 AT*E2STKD
M2M STK Display Text
Description
Command
Possible responses
Answer to the AT*E2STKD=<answer
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
reception of
>
DISPLAY TEXT
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKD=?
•_*E2STKD:
(list of supported <answer>)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to the
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKD.
Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout
expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
generated.
Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow GSM
11.14 standard
<answer>
Description
0
OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed and
cleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Command
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard
1
2
3
Failed.
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session
terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard
Failed.
User requests backwards move: the text was displayed
as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the
session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in the
proactive SIM session requested by the user
Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and
although the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response
from user
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 228 of 228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKD: <priority>,<clear_condition>,<coding>,<text_length>,
<text>
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<priority>
Description
0
1
Display normal priority text
Display high priority text
<clear_condition>
Description
0
1
Clear message after a dalay
Wait for user to clear message
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integter type
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
<text>
Description
string type
Field of maximum length <text_length>, in string type
format between "". Coding is defined in <coding>
15.4 AT*E2STKG
M2M STK Get Inkey
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 229 of 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Command
Possible responses
Answer to the AT*E2STKG
•_+CME ERROR <err>
reception of
GET INKEY
=<answer>,
•_OK
[<response_type>,
<user_response>]
AT*E2STKG=?
Test if the
command is
supported
•_*E2STKG:
(list of supported <answer>),
(list of supported
<response_type>),
<user_response>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the external
application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.
The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user response.
Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout
expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
Test command returns the list of supported values, and the maximum value
of <prompt_text_length>.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<answer>
Description
0
OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It
corresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,
described in the GSM standard
1
2
Failed.
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session
terminated by the user, described in the GSM
standard
Failed.
User requests backward move: the text was displayed
as requested and the user wants to go backwards in
the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in
the proactive SIM session requested by the user
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 230 of 230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No
response from user
Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type> Description
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response
<user_response> Description
String type
Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format
between “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.
Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .
Otherwise it shall be 1 byte
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKG: <coding>,<prompt_text_length>,<prompt_text>
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38
with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as
defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet
<prompt_text_length> Description
Integer type (0-235) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<prompt_text>
<prompt_text>
Description
String type
Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in
string type format between “”. Coding is defined in
<prompt_coding>.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 231 of 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15.5 AT*E2STKI
M2M STK Get Input
Description
Command
Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of GET
INPUT
AT*E2STKI=<answer
>,
[<response_type>,
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
<response_length>, •_ERROR
<user_response>]
AT*E2STKI=?
Test if the
command is
supported
•_*E2STKI: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<response_type>),
<response_length>,
<user_response>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the external
application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI. The external
application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.
AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate answer
after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
Test
command
returns
the
list
of
suported
values,
and
<prompt_text_length>.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<answer> Description
0
OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds
to ‘00’ command performed succesfully, described in the GSM
standard
1
Failed.
User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested
and the user wants to end the proactive session. It
corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user,
described in the GSM standard
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 232 of 232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Failed.
User requests backward move: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.
It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIM
session requested by the user
3
4
Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user
did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user
Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type>
Description
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response
<response_length>
Description
Integer type (0-160)
Value indicating the length of response field
<user_response>. It shall be an integer within
the range between <min_length_response> and
<max_length_response>
<user_response> Description
String type Field of length between <min_length_response> and
<max_length_response>, in string type format
between "". Coding is defined in <response_type>.
Note!_
If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of
<user_response> is 1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives
an ERROR message.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKI: <min_length_response>,<max_length_response>,
<echo_input>,<prompt_coding>,<prompt_text_length>,
<prompt_text>
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<min_length_response> Description
Integer type (0-160)
Value indicating the minimum length of
response field <user_response>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 233 of 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<max_length_response> Description
Integer type (0-160)
Value indicating the maximum length of
response field <user_response>
<echo_input>
Description
0
1
The user input shall be echoed
The user input shall be hidden
<prompt_coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the
SMS default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in
GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds
to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
2
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit
octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds
to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default
alphabet
Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet
<prompt_text_length>
Description
Integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field
<prompt_text>
<prompt_text>
Description
String type
Field of maximum length
<prompt_text_length>, in string type between
“”. Coding is defined in <prompt_coding>
15.6 AT*E2STKL
M2M STK Select Item
Description
Command
Possible responses
Answer to the AT*E2STKL=<answer
•_+CME ERROR <err>
reception of
>, [<user_response>]
•_OK
SELECT ITEM
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 234 of 234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKL=?
•_*E2STKL: (list of supported
<answer>),
(list of supported
<user_response>)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the external
application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKL.
Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout
expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
be generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<answer>
Description
0
OK.
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard
1
2
Failed.
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’
Proactive session terminated by the user, described in
the GSM standard
Failed.
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’
Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested
by the user
3
4
Failed.
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no
response from user
Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<user_response> Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 235 of 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
integer type
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It
identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list
Unsolicited Result Codes:
E2STKL: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,<alpha_id>
[,<default>]<CR><LF>E2STKL: <item_id1>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<item1><CR><LF>[…]E2STKL: <item_idn>,
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn><CR><LF>]
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38
with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined
in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of
7 bit GSM default alphabet
<text_length>
Description
Integer type
(0-240)
Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>, <itemn1>,.<Itemn>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
The maximum length is fixed
<default>
Description
Integer type
The <default> parameter is a single byte between 1
and 255. It shows the default/selected item within the
list
<item_idn>
Description
Integer type
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer
<item_idn>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 236 of 236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<itemn>
Description
String type
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<NbrOfItems>
Description
Integer type
Number of items to be presented in the following
unsolicited results
The maximum length is fixed.
15.7 AT*E2STKM
M2M STK Set Up Menu
Description
Answer to the
reception of SET , <on_off>
UP MENU
Command
Possible responses
AT*E2STKM=<answer>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKM=?
•_*E2STKM: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<on_off>)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the external
application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by means of the
unsolicited result code *E2STKM.
The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter <on_off>
= 0.
Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout
expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
generated.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<answer>
Description
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 237 of 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
1
OK.
Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard
Failed.
User Terminated Session: the command was executed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session
terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard
Failed.
User requests backwards move: the command was
executed as requested and the user wants to go
backwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backward
move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user
Failed.
2
3
No response from user: the command was executed, and
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response
from user
4
5
Failed.
Screen is busy
Failed.
Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to ‘30’.
It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove
the list of menu items
<on_off>
Description
0
1
Remove the current menu
New menu to be displayed
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKM: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,
<alpha_id><CR><LF>E2STKM: <item_id1>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<item1>[<CR><LF>[…]E2STKM: <item_idn>,
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn>]
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 238 of 238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<text_length> Description
Integer type
Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>, <itemn1>, <Itemn>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type between "". Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
The maximum length is fixed.
<item_idn>
Description
Integer type
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer
<item_idn>
<itemn>
Description
String type
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<NbrOfltems> Description
Integer type
Number of Items to be presented in the following
unsolicited results
The maximum length is fixed.
The parameters have no default values.
15.8 AT*E2STKN
M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)
Description
Command
Possible responses
Do the menu
selection
AT*E2STKN=<sel_item
>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 239 of 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKN=?
•_*E2STKN: (list of supported
<sel_item>)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means of
the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.
The Do command allows the external application to select the menu item in
the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU command.
<sel_item>
Description
Integer type
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It
identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-
UP MENU command. Values follow the definition
described in GSM 11.14
15.9 AT*E2STKC
M2M STK Set Up Call
Description
Answer to the
reception of SET UP >
CALL
Command
Possible responses
AT*E2STKC=<answer
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command AT*E2STKC=?
is supported
•_*E2STKC: (list of supported
<answer>)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the external
application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC, so that it takes
up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.
Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout
expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is
generated.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 240 of 240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<answer>
Description
0
OK.
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard
1
2
3
Failed.
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM
standard
Failed.
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’
backward move in the proactive SIM session requested
by the user
Failed.
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no
response from user
4
6
7
Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
Failed.
User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to ‘22’
Failed.
User cleared down call before connection or network
release. It corresponds to ‘23’
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKC: <ton>,<dial_string>,<SetUpRequirement>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<alpha_id>
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<ton>
Description
Integer type
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as
for EFAND. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the
allowed values
<dial_string> Description
String type
Phone number of format <ton>
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 241 of 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length>
Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
The maximum length is fixed
15.10 *E2STKE STK Send Short Message
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKE: <coding>, < text_length >, <alpha_id>
The ME passes the <alpha_id> within SEND SHORT MESSAGE command to
the external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKE.
This informs the external application that the ME is sending an SMS.
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to
0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM
03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM
default alphabet
<text_length>
Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 242 of 242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‘FF’
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give
‘FF’ to indicate “Sending SMS”, so that the external
application is informed
The maximum length is fixed.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 243 of 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15.11 *E2STKP STK Send SS
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKP: <ton>, <SS_string>, <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>,
<SS_return>
The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the external
application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKP. This informs
the external application that the ME has sent an SS string to the network,
and provides the current status after this operation.
<ton>
Description
integer type
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as
for EFAND. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the
allowed values
<SS_string>
Description
String type
SS string of format <ton>
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-
bit GSM default alphabet
<text_length>
Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
‘FF’
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give
‘FF’ to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external
application is informed
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 244 of 244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum length is fixed.
<SS_return>
Description
Integer type
Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation
code, as defined in GSM 04.80, so that the external
application is informed about the result of the SS
operation
15.12 *E2STKU STK Send USSD
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKU: <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>
Description:
The ME shall passes the <alpha_id> parameter within SEND USSD command
to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKU.
This informs the external application that the ME is sending a USSD string to
the network.
<coding>
Description
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-
bit GSM default alphabet
<text_length>
Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id>
Description
String type
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
‘FF’
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give
‘FF’ to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external
application is informed
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 245 of 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15.13 *E2STKR STK Refresh
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKR: <indicator>
The ME informs the external application about the coming REFRESH
command, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKR (eg Reset is
coming).
<indicator>
Description
Integer type
Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested
when sending a REFRESH command
0
1
2
3
4
SIM initialization and full file change notification
File change notification
SIM initialization and file change notification
SIM initialization
SIM reset
15.14 AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings
Parameter Command Syntax:
AT*E2STKTO = <Command>, <timer>
This command allows the external application to configure some general
settings related to STK.
Defined values:
Parameter <Command> is used to define the command that the time
parameter is going to be applied.
Parameter <timer> is used to fix the timeout period applicable to Proactive
SIM mechanism.
<Command>
Description
Integer type (0-6)
It defines the command that the time parameter is
going to be applied
0
All the commands with timeout associated are set
to the value of <timer>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 246 of 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value
of <timer>
Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
Display Text command timeout is set to the value
of <timer>
Get Input command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
Select Item command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
<timer>
Description
Integer type (0-99)
Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the
timeout associated with the command specified in
<command>
0
All the commands timeouts are set to its default
value
(1-99)
The timeout of the command specified in
<command> is set to this value
Unsolicited result code:
*E2STKTO: <command>
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 247 of 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplementary Services
16.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
16.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Reset the ACM
(Accumulated Call
Meter) value on the SIM
AT+CACM=[<passwd>]
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current value AT+CACM?
•_+CACM: <acm>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Tests if the command is AT+CACM=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in SIM file
EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and
preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset the value. If setting fails
in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. See “+CME ERROR (Mobile
Equipment Error Code)”.
Note!_
This command must take into account what line is
chosen with AT*ELIN.
Read command returns the current value of ACM.
<passwd>
Description
String type
SIM-PIN2
<acm>
Description
String type
Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>
under +CAOC
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 248 of 248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set command sets the AT+CAMM=[<acmmax>[
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Advice of Charge
related accumulated
call meter maximum
value in SIM file
EFACMmax
,<passwd>]]
•_ERROR
Read the current value AT+CAMM?
•_+CAMM: <acmmax>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command if AT+CAMM=?
supported
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in
SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units
allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM (refer +CACM) reaches
ACMmax calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the value. If
setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.
<acmmax>
Description
String type
Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded
as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax
feature
<passwd>
Description
String type
SIM PIN2
16.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 249 of 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Execute command
AT+CAOC[=<mode>]
•_[+CAOC: <ccm>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_+CAOC: <mode>
•_OK
Read command, shows AT+CAOC?
the current mode
•_ERROR
Test command, shows if AT+CAOC=?
the command is
supported
•_[+CAOC: (list of
supported <mode>s]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the
subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the
execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME. The
command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event
reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm>
is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than every 10 seconds.
Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same
command.
Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or
not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is
supported.
It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the
supported mode values.
<mode>
Description
0
1
2
Query CCM value
Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm>
Description
String type
Three bytes of the current call meter value in
hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal
value 30); value is in home units and bytes are similarly
coded as ACMmax value in the SIM
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 250 of 250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set command sets the AT+CPUC=<currency>,
parameters of Advice of <ppu>[,<passwd>]
Charge related price per
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
unit and currency table
•_ERROR
in SIM file EFPUCT
Shows the current
values
AT+CPUC?
•_+CPUC:
<currency>,<ppu>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Shows if the command AT+CPUC=?
is supported
•_ERROR
Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency
table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home
units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM PIN1
or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM card that is used) is required to set the
parameters. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.
For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short Message
Services section.
<currency>
Description
String
Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.
SEK)
<ppu>
Description
String type
price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.
“2.66”)
<passwd>
Description
String type
SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 251 of 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Enable and disable
notification with the
unsolicited result code
*EDIF
AT*EDIF=<onoff>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT*EDIF?
•_*EDIF: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT*EDIF=?
supported
•_*EDIF: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes with
the unsolicited result code *EDIF.
<onoff>
Description
0
1
Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF
Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*EDIF: <reason>,<status>,<classx>[,<number>,<type>]
16.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Sets the alpha tag to be AT*EIPS=<ID>,
displayed in the ME <alphatag mode>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 252 of 252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the current setting AT*EIPS?
•_*EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag
mode1><CR><LF>
*EIPS: <ID2>,<alphatag
mode2><CR><LF>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*EIPS=?
supported and list the
possible settings
•_*EIPS: (list of supported
ID>s),(list of supported
<alphatag mode>s)
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of the
Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha tag is the
first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an unsolicited
result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.
<ID>
Description
1
2
Caller ID (*ELIP)
Called ID (*EOLP)
<alphatag mode>
Description
0
1
Off
First name and last name displayed
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*ELIP:<alpha tag>
*EOLP:<alpha tag>
16.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set the current line to AT*ELIN=<line>
<line>
•_*ELIN: <line>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 253 of 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•_ERROR
Read the current line
AT*ELIN?
•_*ELIN: <line>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT*ELIN=?
supported
•_*ELIN: list of
supported <line>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.
Note!_
The following command reads its value from the
current line and is thus affected by the use of
*ELIN:
AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter
<line>
Description
1
2
L1
L2
16.9 AT*E2SSDM2M Supplementary Service Dispatch
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Send Supplementary
Service command
AT*E2SSD=<SS_String
>
•_OK
•_ERROR
•_OK
Shows if the command AT*E2SSD=?
is supported
•_ERROR
This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string in order
to activate, deactivate, interrogate or modify settings for Supplementary
Services.
Once a string is sent, the command will return OK if parsed and sent
successfully, otherwise ERROR is returned. The command does not verify that
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 254 of 254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the operation executes successfully - use the AT*E2SSI command to gain
feedback of the operation status.
Refer to GSM 02.30 for Public MMI services and codes.
<SS_String>
Description
String Type
String in double quotes, containing a Public MMI
command to modify, activate, interrogate or deactivate a
Supplementary Service. String can contain values
‘0-9’, ‘*’ and ‘#’
16.10 AT*E2SSI
M2M Supplementary Service Indications
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Set Supplementary
Service indications
AT*E2SSI=<op>
•_ERROR
•_OK
Displays current settingsAT*E2SSI?
*E2SSI: <op>
Shows if the command AT*E2SSI=?
is supported
•_*E2SSI: (list of
supported <op>s)
•_ERROR
This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code
*E2SSI on network responses (either command confirmation or error
responses) for Supplementary Services. This can be used in conjunction with
the AT+CSSN command which gives responses on the network notification of
SS status.
The default setting is OFF, where responses are disabled.
<op>
Description
0
1
Disable *E2SSI indications. Default value
Enable *E2SSI indications
Unsolicited Result codes:
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<ForwardedToNr>],
[<NoReplyConditionTime>], [<CLI_RestrictionOption>]]]
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 255 of 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<SubscriptionOption>]]]
<errorcode>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OK (no error)
SSI_PASSWORD_ERROR
SSI_TOO_MANY_PARTS
SSI_COMMAND_ERROR
SSI_SIM_ERROR
SSI_NUMBER_ERR
SSI_CALL_BARRED
SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE
SSI_UNSUCCESSFUL
SSI_NOT_ALLOWED
SSI_NETWORK_PROBLEM
<Opcode>
Description
10
11
12
13
14
REGISTER_SS
ERASE_SS
ACTIVATE_SS
DEACTIVATE_SS
INTERROGATE_SS
<SScode>
Description
0
ALL_SS
16
17
18
19
20
21
32
ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION
MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION
ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 256 of 256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL
ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_SUBSCRIBER_NOT_REACHABLE
EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER
40
41
42
43
49
64
ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES
CALL_WAITING
65
66
CALL_HOLD
67
COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER
MULTI_PARTY
81
112
113
114
144
145
146
147
148
ALL_CHARGING_SS
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING
ALL_BARRING_SERVICES
BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS
BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_
DIRECTED_CALLS
153
154
155
BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS
BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS
BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OUTSIDE_HPLMN
<BasicServChoice> Description
2
3
BEARER_SERVICE
TELE_SERVICE
<BasicServValue>
Description
<TELE_SERVICE>
<BEARER_SERVICE>
0
TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES
TS_SPEECH
BS_ALL_BEARER_SERVICES
BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES
BS_DATA_CDA_300BPS
16
17
TS_TELEPHONY
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 257 of 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
20
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS
BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS
BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS
BS_DATA_CDA_4800BPS
BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS
BS_ALL_DATA_CDS_SERVICES
BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS
BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS
BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS
BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS
BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS
TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SERVICBS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES
ES
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
44
45
46
48
56
64
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200BPS
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_2400BPS
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_4800BPS
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_9600BPS
BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES
BS_DATA_PDS_2400BPS
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP
BS_DATA_PDS_4800BPS
BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDA
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDS
TS_VIDEOTEX
TS_TELETEX
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CD
A
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CD
72
S
80
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS
88
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS
BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES
96
TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES
97
TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEECH
TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3
TS_FAX_GROUP4
98
99
104
112
BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES
TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 258 of 258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
128
BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL
TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEPT_S
MS
208
209
TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH
TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY
<SS_Status> Description
0
1
2
4
7
NO_FLAG_SET
SS_STATUS_ACTIVE
SS_STATUS_REGISTERED
SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED
SS_STATUS_PRA
<ForwardedToNr>
Description
String
Phone number string in double quotes
<NoReplyConditionTime> Description
0-65532
Integer value for time
<CLI_Restriction Option> Description
0
1
2
PERMANENT
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED
<Subscription Option>
Description
1
2
5
OVERRIDE_CATEGORY
CLI_RESTRICTION_OPTION
RESTRICTION_PER_CALL
16.11 AT+CCFCCall Forwarding number and Conditions
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 259 of 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request Calling AT+CCFC=<reason>,
•_+CME ERROR <err>
forwarding
number and
conditions
<mode>[,<number>
[,<type>[,<class>
[,<satype>]]]]
•_when <mode>=2 and command
successful:
+CCFC:
<status>,<class1>[,<number>,
<type>[,<satype>]][<CR><LF
>
+CCFC:
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,
<type>[,<satype>
]][...]]
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CCFC=?
•_+ CCFC: (list of supported
<reason>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service.
Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are
supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the
response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if
service is not active for any <class>.
<reason>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unconditional
Mobile busy
No reply
Not reachable
All call forwarding
All conditional call forwarding
<mode>
Description
0
1
2
3
Disable
Enable
Query status
Registration
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 260 of 260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Erasure
<number>
Description
string type
String type phone number of forwarding address in
format specified by <type>
<type>
Description
integer format Type of address octet
129
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown. Default value if ‘+’ is not in <sca>
145
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.
Default value if ‘+’ is in <sca>
161
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
Other values
128 - 255
<satype>
Description
integer format Type of subaddress octet
128
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address
signals
136
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address
signals
160
User defined, even number of address signals
User defined, odd number of address signals
Other values reserved
168
128 - 255
<classx>
Description
integer
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
Default value is 7
1
Voice L1
2
Data
4
Fax
8
Short message service
Data circuit sync
Data circuit async
Dedicated packet access
16
32
64
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 261 of 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Dedicated PAD access
<status>
Description
0
1
Not active
Active
16.12 AT+CCWA
Call Waiting
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request call
waiting
AT+CCWA=[<n>
[,<mode>
[,<class>]]]
•_when<mode>=2 and command
successful:
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<C
R><LF>
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]
+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show the current AT+CCWA?
setting
•_+CCWA: <n>
+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CCWA=?
•_+CCWA: (list of supported
<n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service
according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query are
supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the
response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if
service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n> is used to disable or
enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA:
<number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE when call
waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable when the network is
interrogated.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 262 of 262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<n>
Description
0
1
Disable
Enable
<mode>
Description
0
1
2
Disable
Enable
Query status
<classx>
Description
integer
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
Default value is 7
1
Voice L1
2
Data
4
Fax
8
Short message service
Data circuit sync
Data circuit async
Dedicated packet access
Dedicated PAD access
16
32
64
128
<status>
Description
0
1
Not active
Active
<number>
Description
String type
String type phone number of forwarding address in
format specified by <type>
<type>
Description
Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08
10.5.4.7)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 263 of 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<err>
Description
0
Phone failure
3
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
Invalid index
4
21
30
31
100
No network service
Network timeout
Unknown
Unsolicited Result Codes:
+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>
16.13 AT+CHLDCall Hold and Multiparty
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request call related
supplementary services
AT+CHLD=<n>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show if the command is AT+CHLD=?
supported
•_+CHLD: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command allows control of the following call related services:
ꢀ a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the
connection is retained by the network;
ꢀ multiparty conversation (conference calls);
ꢀ the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other
either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release
the served subscriber's own connection.
Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation, and
transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.
This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call Hold;
refer 3GPP TS 22.083 clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP TS 22.084)
and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091). The interaction of this
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 264 of 264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
command with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary
services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards.
Note!_
Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to
teleservice 11.
It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list of
operations which are supported. The call number required by some
operations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).
<n>
Description
...
Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND
button in GSM 02.30 subclause 4.5.5.1
0
Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy
(UDUB) for a waiting call
0X
1
Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call
Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the
other (held or waiting) call
1X
2
Releases a specific active call X
Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts
the other (held or waiting) call
2X
Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which
communication is supported
3
4
Adds a held call to the conversation
Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber
from both calls (explicit call transfer)
“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence of
setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by the
served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released. New calls
take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a waiting call
exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call (i.e. not to the
held call) in conflicting situation.
Note!_
The “directory number” case shall be handled with
dial command D, and the END case with hangup
command H (or +CHUP).
16.14 AT+CLIP Call Line Identification Presentation
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 265 of 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Requests calling line
identification.
AT+CLIP=<n>
OK
Read the current setting AT+CLIP?
+CLIP: <n>,<m>
Show if the command is AT+CLIP=?
supported
+CLIP: (list of
supported <n>s)
This command enables a called subscriber to get the identity of the calling
line when receiving a mobile terminated call. The “Set” command enables or
disables the presentation of the CLI (calling line identity) at the TE. It has no
effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network.
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (if the calling
subscriber
has
allowed
it),
the
unsolicited
result
code
+CLIP:<number>,<type>,,,<alpha> response is returned after every RING
(or +CRING:<type>) result code sent from TA to TE (refer to AT +CRC in
section ???????).Whether this will be used when a normal voice call is
answered is a manufacturer-specific option.
<n>
Description
0
1
Disables presentation. Default value
Enables presentation
<m>
Description
0
1
2
CLIP not provisioned
CLIP provisioned
Unknown (e.g. no network)
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,,,<alpha>
Defined values:
<number>
Description
String
Type phone number of format specified by <type> type
of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08,
sub-clause 10.5.4.7)
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 266 of 266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<type>
Description
129
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan,
national/international unknown
145
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international
number
161
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128-255
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
16.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request calling line
identification restriction
AT+CLIR=[<n>]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT+CLIR?
•_+CLIR: <n>,<m>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Test if the command is AT+CLIR=?
supported
•_+CLIR: (list of supported
<n>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 that allows a
calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the
called party when originating a call.
Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or
allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all
following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can revoke this
adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without provision of
CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according GSM 02.81.
The setting shall be per logical channel.
When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter setting
<n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall be used
according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 267 of 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls (given in
<n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR
service (given in <m>).
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
Note!_
On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in
subclause “ITU-T V.25ter dial command”.
<n>
Description
0
Presentation indicator is used according to the
subscription of the CLIR service
1
2
CLIR invocation
CLIR suppression
Note!_
<m>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
CLIR not provisioned
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
Unknown (e.g. no network)
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
Note!_
16.16 AT+CSSNSupplementary Service Notification
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Presentation of
notification result codes ]
from TA to TE
AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Read the current setting AT+CSSN?
•_+CSSN: <n>,<m>
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 268 of 268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test if the command is AT+CSSN=?
supported
•_+CSSN: (list of
supported <n>s),(list
of supported <m>s)
•_+CME ERROR <err>
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated
notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of
notification result codes from TA to TE.
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a
mobile
originated
call
setup,
unsolicited
result
code
+CSSI:
<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes
presented in this ETS or in V.25ter. When several different <code1>s are
received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result
code.
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a
mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward check
supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result code +CSSU:
<code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call setup, result code is sent
after every +CLIP result code (refer command “Calling line identification
presentation +CLIP”) and when several different <code2>s are received from
the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code.
Note!_
The difference between <index> and <cindex> is
that <index> is a position mark while <cindex> is a
unique value for each CUG. <index> is not
supported.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<n>
Description
0
1
Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the
TA
Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the
TA
<m>
Description
0
1
Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the
TA
Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the
TA
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 269 of 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<code1>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unconditional call forwarding is active
Some of the conditional call forwarding are active
Call has been forwarded
Call is waiting
This is a CUG call (also <index> present)
Outgoing calls are barred
Incoming calls are barred
CLIR suppression rejected
<index>
Description
0…9
10
CUG index
No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
<code2>
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)
Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)
Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)
Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)
Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS
notification) (during a voice call)
6
Forward check SS message received (can be received
whenever)
10
Incoming call has been forwarded
16.17 AT+CUSD
Unstructured Supplementary Service
Data
Description
Command
Possible Responses
Request unstructured
supplementary service ]]
data
AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>
•_+CME ERROR: <err>
•_OK
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 270 of 270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show supported
message types along
with the current service
setting
AT+CUSD?
•_+CUSD: <n>
•_OK
•_ERROR
Show list of supported AT+CUSD=?
services
•_+CUSD: (list of
supported <n>s)
•_OK
•_ERROR
This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and mobile initiated
operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the
presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network,
or network initiated operation) +CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In
addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is
not given then the default value 0 is taken.
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD
string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response
USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited
+CUSD: result code.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM
supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
Some different scenarios are shown below:
ꢀAn incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to
the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the
external application has enabled result code presentation.
ꢀAn incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the
external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the
external application has enabled result code.
ꢀIf the external application answers to the request with the command
AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.
ꢀA USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the external
application.
The different alternatives are shown below.
Network
Mobile Equipment
External application
1
Signal
Sends unsolicited
result code +CUSD enabled, presented
Result code presentation
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 271 of 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Signal asking Sends unsolicited
Result code presentation
for reply
result code +CUSD enabled, presented
3
Answer AT+CUSD
3b
Sends AT+CUSD
<n>
Description
0
1
2
Disable result code presentation in the TA
Enable result code presentation in the TA
Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to
the read command response
<str>
Description
string
String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network
is not interrogated):
-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is
used:
*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select
TE Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into
current TE character set according to rules of
GSM 07.05 Annex A
Example 1
AT Command
Result Code
Description
AT+CUSD=1,“*34#”
Enable the Result Code
presentation in the TAE
and send a USSD-
request
+CUSD:1,“id code” OK Further user action
required, give id code
AT+CUSD=1,“7465338
”
Id code given
+CUSD:0 OK
No further user action
required
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 272 of 272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
AT Command
Result Code
Description
+CUSD:0,“Expensive Incoming USSD-notify telling
incoming call”
the user that the incoming call
is expensive
Example 3
AT Command
Result Code
Description
AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#
”
Enable the Result Code
presentation in the TAE
and send a USSD-request
asking for an alarm at the
time 07:00
+CUSD:0,“ALARM” At 07:00 the network
sends an alarm to the user
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 273 of 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands
AT Command
Description
Page No.
AT
Attention Command
131
135
135
131
136
131
132
97
AT&C
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control
AT&D
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response
Set to Factory Defined Configuration
Circuit 107 (DSR) Response
Store User Profile
AT&F
AT&S
AT&W
AT*
List all Supported AT Commands
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation
Ericsson M2M Cell Description
Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification
Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode
M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time
Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification
Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS
Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum
M2M Service Provider Indication
M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch
M2M Supplementary Service Indications
Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number
M2M STK Set Up Call
AT*E2APR
AT*E2CD
AT*E2EAMS
AT*E2EMM
AT*E2ESC
AT*E2FAX
AT*E2NBTS
AT*E2PBCS
AT*E2SPN
AT*E2SSD
AT*E2SSI
AT*E2SSN
AT*E2STKC
AT*E2STKD
AT*E2STKG
AT*E2STKI
AT*E2STKL
AT*E2STKM
AT*E2STKN
AT*E2STKO
AT*E2STKS
AT*EALR
AT*EALS
145
91
147
144
129
167
169
153
241
242
156
228
218
219
221
224
226
228
233
217
99
M2M STK Display Text
M2M STK Get Inkey
M2M STK Get Input
M2M STK Select Item
M2M STK Set Up Menu
M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)
SIM Application Toolkit Settings
SIM Application Toolkit Settings
Ericsson Audio Line Request
Ericsson Request ALS Status
153
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 274 of 274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT*EAMS
AT*EARS
AT*ECAM
AT*ECPI
AT*ECSP
AT*EDIF
AT*EDST
AT*EGIR
AT*EIPS
AT*ELAM
AT*ELIN
AT*EMAR
AT*EMIC
AT*EMIR
AT*EPEE
AT*EPNR
AT*EPNW
AT*ESAG
AT*ESCG
AT*ESCN
AT*ESDG
AT*ESDI
AT*ESGR
AT*ESLN
AT*ESNU
AT*EXVC
AT+CACM
AT+CAMM
AT+CAOC
AT+CBST
AT+CCFC
AT+CCLK
AT+CCWA
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal
Ericsson Call Monitoring
100
101
74
Ciphering Indicator
165
154
239
75
Ericsson Customer Service Profile
Ericsson Divert Function
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time
Ericsson Group Item Read
Identity Presentation Set
Ericsson Local Audio Mode
Ericsson Line Set
134
240
102
241
76
Ericsson Master Reset
Ericsson Microphone Mode
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request
Ericsson Pin Event
102
103
76
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network
Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network
Ericsson Add to Group
155
156
169
170
171
173
173
174
157
175
103
235
236
237
105
247
77
Ericsson Create Group
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number
Ericsson Delete Group
Ericsson Delete Group Item
Ericsson Group Read
Ericsson Set Line Name
Ericsson Settings Number
Ericsson SET External Volume Control
Accumulated Call Meter
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
Advice of Charge
Select Bearer Service Type
Call Forwarding Number and Conditions
Set Clock and Date
Call Waiting
249
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 275 of 275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT+CEER
Extended Error Report
Set Phone Functionality
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate
GPRS Attach or Detach
Enter Data State
77
78
AT+CFUN
AT+CGACT
AT+CGATT
AT+CGDATA
109
110
111
112
114
132
132
133
115
116
118
121
122
133
251
123
124
125
126
127
65
AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
AT+CGEREP
AT+CGMI
AT+CGMM
AT+CGMR
AT+CGPADDR
AT+CGQMIN
AT+CGQREQ
AT+CGREG
AT+CGSMS
AT+CGSN
AT+CHLD
AT+CHSC
AT+CHSD
AT+CHSN
AT+CHSR
AT+CHSU
AT+CHUP
AT+CIMI
GPRS Event Reporting
Read MS Manufacturer Identification
Read MS Model Identification
Read MS Revision Identification
Show PDP Address
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
GPRS Network Registration Status
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
Read MS Product Serial Number Identification
Call Hold and Multiparty
HSCSD Current Call Parameters
HSCSD Device Parameters
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration
HSCSD Parameters Report
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading
Hang Up Call
Subscriber Identification
158
79
AT+CIND
AT+CLAC
AT+CLCK
AT+CLIP
Indicator Control
List All Available AT Commands
Facility Lock
80
158
252
253
80
Calling Line Identification
AT+CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Mobile Equipment Error
AT+CMEE
AT+CMER
AT+CMGC
AT+CMGD
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
Send Command
81
191
209
Delete Message
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 276 of 276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT+CMGF
AT+CMGL
AT+CMGR
AT+CMGS
AT+CMGW
AT+CMOD
AT+CMSS
AT+CMUX
AT+CNMI
AT+CNUM
AT+COLP
AT+COPS
AT+CPAS
AT+CPBF
AT+CPBR
AT+CPBS
AT+CPBW
AT+CPIN
AT+CPMS
AT+CPUC
AT+CPWD
AT+CR
Message Format
184
203
198
187
184
66
List Message
Read Message
Send Message
Write Message to Memory
Call Mode
Send From Storage
190
139
194
160
161
163
82
Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol
New Message Indications to TE
Subscriber Number
Connected Line Identification Presentation
Operator Selection
Phone Activity Status
Phonebook Find
176
176
178
179
83
Phonebook Read
Phone Storage
Phonebook Write
PIN Control
Preferred Message Storage
Price Per Unit and Currency Table
Change Password
181
238
85
Service Reporting Control
Cellular Result Code
Network Registration
Restore SMS Settings
Radio Link Protocol
87
AT+CRC
87
AT+CREG
AT+CRES
AT+CRLP
AT+CSAS
AT+CSCA
AT+CSCB
AT+CSCS
AT+CSDH
AT+CSMP
AT+CSMS
164
141
107
88
Save Settings
Service Centre Address
Select Cell Broadcast Message Type
Select Character Set
Show Text Mode Parameters
Set Text Mode Parameters
Select Message Service
183
215
211
209
210
212
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 277 of 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT+CSQ
AT+CSSN
AT+CTZU
AT+CUSD
AT+CVHU
"AT+F____"
AT+GCAP
AT+ICF
AT+IFC
AT+ILRR
AT+IPR
AT+VTS
AT+WS46
ATA
Signal Strength
89
255
90
Supplementary Service Notification
Automatic Time Zone Update
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
Voice Hang-Up
257
67
Low Level Fax Commands
Request Modem Capabilities List
Cable Interface Character Format
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting
Cable Interface Port Command
DTMF and Tone Generation
Mode Selection
130
174
141
142
143
143
67
136
61
Answer
ATD
Dial
62
ATE
Command Echo
137
64
ATH
Hang up
ATI
Identification Information
Return to Online Data Mode
Select Pulse Dialling
133
64
ATO
ATP
64
ATQ
Result Code Suppression
Automatic Answer Control
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control
Escape Sequence Character
Command Line Termination Character
Response Formatting Character
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)
Blind Dial Delay Control
69
ATS0
69
ATS10
ATS2
74
70
ATS3
70
ATS4
71
ATS5
72
ATS6
72
ATS7
Connection Completion Timeout
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control
Select Tone Dialling
72
ATS8
72
ATT
64
ATV
DCE Response Format
137
65
ATX
Call Progress Monitoring Control
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 278 of 278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATZ
Reset to Default Configuration
138
Unsolicited
Result Code
Description
Page No.
*E2STKE
*E2STKP
*E2STKR
*E2STKU
STK Send Short Message
STK Send SS
230
231
233
232
STK Refresh
STK Send USSD
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 279 of 279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End of Document
Owner’s Manual
Rev 1.0
Page 280 of 280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|